Please read “Safety Brochure” before use.
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
English for North America, Europe and Oceania
En 2
CONTENTS
Check the supplied items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Full of useful functions!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
At time like this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
SETUP
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
5.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
4.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
3.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
5.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Cable plugs and jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Audio/video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Analog video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Audio jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Connecting playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Connecting to the jack on the front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Connecting the FM/AM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting recording devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Preparation before using YPAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Confirming the measurement result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching the information displayed on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) . . . . . . . . 32
Changing the settings for the SCENE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Enjoying the desired sound field effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround decoder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Playback without sound field effects (straight decoding mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Playing back fidelity sound of the selected source (direct mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Playing back the compressed audio dynamically (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Enjoying surround audio with headphones (SILENT CINEMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Listening to FM/AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting a frequency for reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Registering favorite stations (Preset tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Radio Data System tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Combining audio from the radio with video from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Playing back songs with iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Controlling by iPod itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
En 3
Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pairing Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Playing back songs by connecting to the Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Playing back songs with USB storage devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Combining a song from a USB storage device (iPod) with video from an external device. . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source
(Option menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Available settings in Option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Setup menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Configuring the settings of audio output signals (Sound). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Configuring the various settings (Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Setting HDMI functions (HDMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Setting the language displayed on the TV screen (Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Configuring the system settings of the unit
(ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Changing the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Changing the remote control ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Changing TV format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Initializing various settings for the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Controlling other devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Registering remote control codes for TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Registering remote control codes for external device operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Initializing all remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Power/system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tuner (FM/AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ideal speaker layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
HDMI signal compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
PLAYBACK (continued)
En 4
Check the supplied items
Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product.
■ Remote Control ■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2)
■ YPAO microphone ■ VIDEO AUX input cover
■ AM antenna ■ FM antenna
* The supplied FM antenna will differ depending
on the country or region.
■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) ■ Easy Setup Guide
■ Safety Brochure
Preparing the remote control
• Insert the two supplied AAA batteries into the battery case, following the polarity markings (+ and -).
Operating range of the remote control
• Be sure to aim the remote control within the following range at the remote control sensor on the unit
during operation.
• This manual is created prior to production of the product. Some parts of the product and the
specifications may differ as a result of improvements, etc.
• This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• “ ” indicates the explanations for better use.
• “ ” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit.
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod.” “iPod” means both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions.
Within
6 m (20 ft.)
En 5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Selecting the input source and
favorite settings at once (SCENE)
p.32
p.24
p.87
p.26
p.34
p.36
p.37
p.43, 50
p.46, 52
p.74
Easily connecting devices such
as game console to the audio/
video jacks on the front panel
Operating the TV, AV
receiver and BD/DVD player
in combination
(HDMI Control)
Supports 2 to 5.1 channel speaker system.
Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.
Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
Sound field reproductions like actual
movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
Multi-channel playback from stereo
sounds (surround decoder)
Enjoying enhanced compression
artifacts (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Enjoying music stored on
iPod or Bluetooth devices
Operating the iPod or USB
menu (on TV)
* Requires optional Yamaha products such as iPod dock, iPod
wireless system, and Bluetooth receiver.
PC
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control
USB device
iPod dock/iPod
wireless system
(optional)
Bluetooth receiver
(optional)
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
BD/DVD player
Remote control
of this unit
TV remote control
Video
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Speakers
Audio
TV
En 6
Full of useful functions!
● Connecting various devices (p.16, 21)
Various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to
connect external devices such as BD/DVD player and
CD player. The unit is also equipped with input jacks on
the front panel which allow you easily connect and enjoy
game consoles, camcorders and USB devices, and so
on.
● Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio
Return Channel: ARC) (p.16, 70)
When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need an
HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit. Making
such a simple connection enables to output video to the
TV, input audio from the TV, and transmit HDMI Control
signals at once.
● Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.36)
The unit supports the surround playback of up to 5.1
channel. Various sound programs and surround
decoders equipped with the unit can supply more
intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in your
room. And, the unit creates virtual presence speakers to
produce 3D surround sound (CINEMA DSP 3D).
● Listening to radio with built-in receiver
(p.38)
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as
preset stations automatically or manually.
● Enjoying faithful sound compared to the
original source (p.37)
When the Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back
the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you
to enjoy the faithful sound quality compared to the
original source.
● Easy operation with a TV monitor
When connecting your TV to the unit with an HDMI
cable, the menu of the unit can be displayed on the TV
monitor to operate the unit. You can set the settings of
the unit viewing the TV monitor.
• YPAO (p.26)
• Operation menus of iPod and USB device (p.46, 52)
• The “Option” menu (p.56)
• The “Setup” menu (p.60)
At time like this
The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on
this unit does not match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack of your external device (p.22).
I want to fine adjust sound quality...
Use “Equalizer” in the “Setup” menu to adjust sound quality
of tone with an equalizer (p.63).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.64).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to redirect the
output audio signal to the TV (p.70).
I want to prevent forgetting to turn the unit off...
Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to prevent
forgetting to turn the unit off (p.68).
I want to play back BD/DVD player without the unit
turned on...
Use “Standby Through” in the “Setup” menu to play back
BD/DVD player while the unit keeps to be turned off (p.71).
There are many other functions to customize or confirm
the settings of this unit.
For details, see the following pages.
• SCENE settings (p.32)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.65)
• Various function settings (p.68)
• Current signal information (audio signal, video signal)
(p.58)
• Basic settings before use (p.72)
BD/DVD
player
Camcorder
TV
CD
player
USB
device
Portable
audio player
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
En 7
Front panel
1 (power) key
Turns the unit on or into the standby mode.
2 Standby indicator
When the unit is in standby mode, lights up in any of the
following cases when:
- The “Standby Through” function is working (p.71).
- The iPod is charging with “Standby Charge” (p.58).
- The Yamaha iPod wireless system is connected (p.45).
3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.26).
4 Remote control receiver
Receives signals from remote control (p.4).
5 INFO
Changes the information displayed on the front display
(p.31).
6 MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (p.39).
7 PRESET
Selects the FM/AM preset stations (p.39).
8 FM/AM
Switches FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (p.38).
9 Front display
Displays information about the unit (p.8).
0 TUNING
Changes FM/AM tuner frequency (p.38).
a DIRECT
Enables/disables the direct mode (p.37).
b PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
c USB port
For connecting USB devices (p.52).
d INPUT
Switches the selected input source.
e TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers
and headphones (p.57).
f SCENE
Selects the input source and the sound programs with a
single button. When the unit is in standby mode, press this
key to turn on the unit (p.32).
g PROGRAM
Selects a sound program and surround decoder (p.33).
h STRAIGHT
Enables/disables the straight decoding mode (p.37).
i VIDEO AUX jack
For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.24).
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover (p.4) when not
using this jack to protect against dust.
j VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
Part names and functions
INFO MEMORY PRESET
FM
AM TUNING
DIRECT
VOLUME
VIDEO
PORTABLE
L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHTTONE CONTROL
BD
DVD
TV CD RADIO
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
USB
iPod/iPhone
PROGRAM
SCENE
INPUT
YPAO MIC
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V471
En 8
Front display (indicator)
1 HDMI
Lights up when an HDMI device is connected to the unit or
an HDMI signal is being output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are output.
2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when a sound program with CINEMA DSP is
activated.
3 CINEMA DSP 3D
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.36) is activated.
4 ENHANCER
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37) is
activated.
5 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.57) is activated.
6 STEREO
Lights up when stereo broadcasting is input.
TUNED
Lights up when an FM/AM station is received.
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on (p.31).
8 MUTE
Flashes when audio is muted.
9 VOLUME
Displays the current volume level.
0 Cursor indicators
Lights up the available cursors on the remote control for each
operation.
a Multi information display
Displays a range of information.
Press INFO on the remote control or front panel repeatedly to
cycle through displayed information (p.31).
b Speaker indicators
Displays speaker terminals from which signals are output.
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
MUTE
ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC
OUT
3
Front speaker L
Front speaker R
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround speaker R
Subwoofer
En 9
Rear panel
1 DOCK jack
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock,
Wireless System for iPod and Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver (p.44, 45, 50).
2 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting a TV that is compatible with HDMI input to
output audio/video signals. TV audio is input when ARC is
used (p.16, 18, 19).
3 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (p.24).
4 HDMI 1-4 jacks
For connecting external devices that are compatible with
HDMI outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.21).
5 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting speakers (p.14).
6 Power cable
For connecting the unit to an AC wall outlet (p.25).
7 MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting a TV that is compatible with component video
signals and outputting video signals (p.20).
VIDEO jack
For connecting a TV that is compatible with video signals to
output video signals (p.20).
8 AV1-6 jacks
For connecting to playback devices equipped with audio/
video outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.21).
9 AV OUT jacks
For outputting received audio/video signals when analog
inputs (AV5-6 or AUDIO) are selected (p.25).
0 AUDIO jacks
For connecting to playback devices equipped with analog
audio outputs to input audio signals (p.23).
a SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (p.14).
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
75Ω
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
MAINS
SPEAKERS
R
L
L
R
L
R
AV
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
DOCK
SUBWOOFER
(U.K. and Europe models)
The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in
white. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV
or other external device.
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
75Ω
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
R
L
AV
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
HDMI 4
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SPEAKERS
L
R
L
R
DOCK
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
7
5Ω
AM
FM
ANTENN
A
V
IDE
O
A
V1
A
A
O
PTICAL
A
V2
A
A
A
V 3
A
A
A
V4
A
A
A
V 5
A
A
A
V 6
A
A
A
U
DI
O
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIAL
(CD
)
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
R
L
H
DMI
4
F
R
O
NT
C
ENTE
R
S
URR
O
UND
S
PEAKER
S
L
R
L
R
Output jacks
En 10
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE (source power)
Switches an external device on and off.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source on the unit to play back.
4 Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM tuner.
5 INFO
Switches the information displayed on the front display
(p.31).
6 SLEEP
Selects the time of sleep timer (120 min., 90 min., 60 min.,
30 min., and Off) by pressing this key repeatedly. SLEEP
indicator lights up on the front display while using the sleep
timer. After the selected time passes, the unit switches into
the standby mode.
7 SCENE
Switch the input source and the sound program with a single
button. When the unit is in standby mode, pressing this key
turns on the unit (p.32).
8 SETUP
Displays/finishes the “Setup” menu for the unit (p.60).
9 Menu operation keys
0 External device operation keys
Operate recording, playback, menu displays, etc. for
external devices (p.75, 76).
a MODE
Switches the FM broadcast receiving modes (p.38) or the
iPod operation modes (p.49).
b Numeric keys
Enter numbers such as the frequency of FM/AM tuner and
remote control codes.
c TV control keys
Controls TV operation, such as input and volume level
(p.74, 75).
d CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external devices (p.74).
e SOURCE/RECEIVER
Switches the device (external device or the unit) that is available
with remote control keys. Lights up in orange when the unit is
selected, in green when an external device is selected.
f RECEIVER (receiver power)
Switches the unit between on and standby mode.
g Sound selection keys
Switches between the sound field effect (sound program)
you are using and the surround decoder (p.33).
h OPTION
Displays/finishes the “Option” menu for each input source
(p.56).
i VOLUME
Adjusts the volume balance (p.31).
j MUTE
Turns the mute function on and off (p.31).
• Remote control codes need to be registered in advance to operate
external devices with this remote control. If you use HDMI
compatible devices, remote control might be available only by
connecting them (p.87).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
DOCK
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
[ A ]
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
HDMI 1-4 HDMI 1-4 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel
AV 1-6 AV 1-6 jacks
AUDIO Audio jack
DOCK A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod
wireless receiver, and Bluetooth
wireless receiver that are connected to
the DOCK jack.
TUNER FM/AM tuner
USB USB devices connected the USB jack.
[A] Switches an external device that can
be operated with the External device
operation keys without changing inputs
(p.75).
FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
MEMORY Presets radio stations.
PRESET Selects a preset station.
TUNING Changes tuning frequencies.
Cursor keys Select menu items and settings.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen when
the menu is displayed.
En 11
SETUP
Perform the following 8 steps before use.
All settings needed before use are completed here. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Speaker layout (p.12)
Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers, and then place the speakers in
the room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.14)
Connect each speaker to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.16)
Connect TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.21)
Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) or audio devices (CD players, etc.) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.24)
Connect the FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting recording devices (p.25)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.25)
After all the settings above are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically
(YPAO) (p.26)
Adjust the volume balance and tone of speakers automatically (YPAO).
En 12
Select the speaker layout depending on the numbers of speakers, and then place the speakers and subwoofer (with a built-in amplifier) in the room.
The following section describes the representative speaker configuration of 2.1 to 5.1 channel system.
• To get recommended speaker layout, refer to “Ideal speaker layout” (p.83).
1 Speaker layout
NOTES
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The unit is configured to 8Ω speakers as the factory setting. 6Ω speakers can be also connected. For details on settings for 6Ω speaker connection, refer to “Changing the speaker
impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” (p.72).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6Ω.
Type of speakers Abbr. Function
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L)
For the front channel sound (stereo sound) and effect sound
●●●●
Front (R) ●●●●
Center For the center channel sound (dialogue, vocals, etc.) ●●
Surround (L)
For effect and vocal sound from surround channel. The surround back channel sound is output from the surround speakers
when 7.1- or 6.1-channel sounds are input.
●●
Surround (R) ●●
Subwoofer For low-frequency effect (LFE) sound and bass sound from front and surround channels. ●●●●
1
Speaker layout
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
En 14
Connect speakers to the unit. Here are connections of
5.1-channel speaker layout as examples. If you select
another channel speaker layout, connect speakers while
referring to the connection of 5.1-channel speaker
layout.
Necessary cables (not supplied)
Speaker cables x numbers of speakers
Monaural pin cable (for subwoofer) x 1
5.1-channel speaker layout
■ Connecting speaker cables
Each speaker has two speaker cables. One is for
connecting the - (negative) terminal of the unit and the
speaker, and the other is for the + (positive) terminal.
The cables are different colors, so they do not get mixed
up. Connect the black side to the - (negative) terminal
and the other side to the + (positive) terminal.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in.) of insulation
from the end of the speaker cable and twist the bare
wire firmly.
2 Loosen the speaker
terminal.
3 Insert the bare wire
into the gap on the
side of terminal.
When it is difficult to
insert the wire into the
gap on the side,
insert it into the gap downside of terminal.
4 Tighten the terminal.
Connecting with a banana plug (Except for U.K. and
Europe models)
Tighten the knob, and then insert a banana plug into the
end of the terminal.
■ Connecting a subwoofer
Use monaural pin cable to connect a subwoofer.
Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off the subwoofer.
2 Connecting speakers
NOTES
• Disconnect the power plug before connecting speakers.
• Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off a subwoofer.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch
anything or come into contact with the metal areas of the unit.
This may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables
short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front
display when the unit is switched on.
Speaker terminals on the rear of the unit
–
+
–
+
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
75Ω
PR
PB
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
L
R
L
R
MONITOR OUT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
L
R
L
R
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
F
RO
N
T
+ (Red)
- (Black)
F
RON
T
Banana plug
Monaural pin cable
1 2
Connecting speakers
3 4 5 6 7 8
En 15
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for devices.
Audio/video jacks
HDMI jacks
Digital videos and sounds are transmitted. Use an HDMI
cable for connection.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. Using an HDMI cable
less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft.) long is recommended to prevent signal
quality degradation.
• When connecting an external device with a DVI jack, use an HDMI/
DVI-D cable.
• The HDMI control function, the Audio Return Channel function and
transmission of 3D content are supported.
Analog video jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
The signal is separated into three devices:
Luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and
chrominance red (PR).
Use a component video pin cable with three plugs.
VIDEO jack
This jack transmits conventional analog video signal.
Use a video pin cable.
Audio jacks
OPTICAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use
fiber-optic cables for connection. Remove the cap
before using if needed.
COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use
coaxial cables.
AUDIO jacks
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals.
Use stereo pin cables.
PORTABLE jack
This jack transmits conventional analog audio signals.
Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting.
Cable plugs and jacks
HDMI cable
P
R
P
B
Y
Component video cables
Red
Blue
Green
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
En 16
Connect a TV to the unit. The video signals input to the unit are output to the TV.
TV audio can also be output from the unit. The recommended way to connect a TV
varies depending on types and functions of video input jacks on the TV.
Select how to connect the TV to the unit while referring to the TV manual.
■ Connection method 1
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following connections and steps are supplied, supposing that “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been
changed from the default setting (p.69).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
viewing the TV monitor (p.60).
• If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you
also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog
video cable (p.20).
Necessary settings
To use the HDMI control function and ARC, the following settings are required in
advance.
1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC
power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices.
3 Connecting a TV
HDMI, component video, or composite video signal input to the unit is output from
the same type of output jack (p.86). Make necessary connections, and switch the
input source on TV depending on the playback device.
What is the HDMI control function?
By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, some operations for the unit are
available with the TV’s remote control, such as turning on/standby and volume
control. If playback devices that support the HDMI control function (BD/DVD
players, etc.) are connected to the unit, these are also acceptable. For more details,
refer to “HDMI Control” (p.87).
What is the Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
If your TV supports the ARC, TV audio can be output to the unit by using an HDMI
cable transmitting video signals from the unit to a TV.
Does you TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does you TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
No
No
No
■ Connection method 1 (on this page)
■ Connection method 4 (p.20)*
■ Connection method 2 (p.18)
■ Connection method 4 (p.20)*
■ Connection method 3 (p.19)
■ Connection method 4 (p.20)*
* Necessary if your playback device is connected to the
video input jacks other than HDMI1-4 jacks.
■ Connection method 4 (p.20)
Yes
Yes
Yes
and
and
and
(ARC-compatible TV)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
75Ω
PR
PB
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONIT
O
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
ARC
IHDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
TV
Continues to the
next page
1 2 3
Connecting a TV
4 5 6 7 8
En 17
2 Configure the settings for ARC.
a Confirm that the ARC function for the TV is set to on.
For details on how to confirm, refer to manual of the TV.
b Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit.
c Press SETUP.
d Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI.”
e Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER.
f Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “On,” and then press ENTER.
g Confirm that “ARC” is set to “On.”
• “ARC” is set to “On” as the default setting. When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the ARC function of
the unit is enabled.
h Press SETUP.
3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI
control function.
For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to the manual of each device.
b Turn off the TV.
The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they
do not turn off, turn them off manually.
c Turn on the TV.
The unit also turns on with the TV. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually.
d Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit.
e Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following:
Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI
input source (any of “HDMI 1-4”). When it is not selected, select the correct input
source manually.
TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV
screen.
f Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows:
Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices.
If these operations are not available, check that “HDMI Control” (p.69) in the “Setup”
menu is set to “On.”
• If playing back audio source by using the ARC function has a problem, set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu
to “Off,” and connect the TV and the unit with an optical cable (p.18).
• If the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to reset
them or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in.
• If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV.
All settings have been completed.
When a TV program is selected with the TV remote control, input source of the unit is
switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output.
If it does not work correctly, confirm that the “ARC” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.”
• “AV4” is selected as the input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is
used for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” on the
“Setup” menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.32), register the appropriate input source on
SCENE (TV).
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
TOP
POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
V
OLUME
T
OP
POP UP
DISPL
A
Y
A
A
OPTION
SETUP
ENTER
URN
DIS
N
RN
D
Cursor keys
1 2 3
Connecting a TV
4 5 6 7 8
En 18
■ Connection method 2
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable.
• The following connection and steps are supplied, supposing the “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been
changed from the default setting (p.69).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
viewing the TV monitor (p.60).
• If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you
also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog
video cable (p.20).
Necessary setting
To use the HDMI control function, the following settings are required in advance.
1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC
power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices.
2 Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI
control function.
For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to manual of each device.
b Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit.
c Press SETUP.
d Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI.”
e Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER.
f Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “On,” and then press ENTER.
g Press SETUP.
h Turn off the TV.
The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they
do not turn off, turn them off manually.
i Turn on the TV.
The unit also turns on. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually.
j Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit.
(HDMI Control -compatible TV)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
75Ω
PR
PB
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONIT
O
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
ARC
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
I
HDMI
AUDIO1
AV 6
AV
OUT
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
Audio output
(Digital optical)
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
TV
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
TOP
POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
V
OLUME
T
OP
POP UP
DISPL
A
Y
A
A
OPTION
SETUP
ENTER
URN
DIS
N
RN
D
Cursor keys
Continues to the
next page
1 2 3
Connecting a TV
4 5 6 7 8
En 19
k Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following:
Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI
input source (any of “HDMI 1-4”). When it is not selected, select the correct input
source manually.
TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV
screen.
l Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows:
Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices.
If these operations are not available, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu
is set to “On.”
All settings have been completed.
When a TV program is selected with the TV’s remote control, the input source of the
unit is switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output.
When these operations are not linked, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup”
menu is set to “On.”
• When the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to
reset or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in.
• If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV.
• “AV4” is selected as input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is used
for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” of the “Setup”
menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.32), register the appropriate input source for SCENE
(TV).
■ Connection method 3
Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable.
By switching input source into “AV4” with AV4 key on the remote control or SCENE. TV
sound is output from the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while
viewing the TV monitor (p.60).
• If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you
also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog
video cable (p.20).
• When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except when an OPTICAL jack (with an
optical cable) is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV 1-6 or AUDIO) for the
connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.32).
(TV with HDMI input jacks)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
75Ω
PR
PB
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONIT
O
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
AUDIO1
AV 6
AV
OUT
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ARC
I
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
Audio output
(Digital optical)
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
TV
1 2 3
Connecting a TV
4 5 6 7 8
En 20
■ Connection method 4
The video signals input from the playback device to the analog video input jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) are output from the same type of the MONITOR OUT
jack to the TV.
Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack of the same type as the analog video input
jacks connected to the playback device, depending on the input jack on the TV.
By switching the input source to “AV4” with AV4 on the remote control or SCENE (TV),
TV sound is output from the unit.
• When connecting to a TV with a cable, other than an HDMI cable, operations with TV screen (such as the
setting of the unit, operations of iPod/USB devices) are not available.
• When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except for an OPTICAL jack (with an
optical cable), is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV1-6 or AUDIO) for the
connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.32).
COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component cable)
VIDEO connection (with a video pin cable)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
75Ω
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONIT
O
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AV 6
AV
OUT
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
O
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
Audio output
(Digital optical)
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
TV
Video input
(Component video)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
V
V
MONITOR OUT
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
AUDIO1
AV 6
AV
OUT
AV 4
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
O
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(Analog video)
Audio output
(Digital optical)
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack
TV
1 2 3
Connecting a TV
4 5 6 7 8
En 21
The unit is equipped with various types of input jacks such as an HDMI jack. Connect
them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices.
For connecting an iPod, Bluetooth devices and USB storage devices, refer to the
following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.43)
• Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (p.50)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.52)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Video devices, such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and cable TV, and game
consoles, are connected to the unit. Select the correct connection according to the
output jacks (video/audio) of video devices connected to the unit. If a video device
supports HDMI, HDMI connection is recommended.
• When an input jack of the unit does not match the output jack of a video device, select another jack of the
unit for the video device (p.22).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
By selecting the input source with the HDMI 1-4 key, audio and video from video
devices are output from the unit.
• To play back the playback device connected to the HDMI1-4 jacks, it is necessary to connect the TV to the
HDMI OUT jack (p.16, 18, 19). When playing back the device, switch the input source on TV to the HDMI
input connected to the unit.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component cable and an audio cable (an
optical cable or a coaxial cable). Input jacks of the unit (AV1-2) are different depending
on the audio jacks of the video device.
By selecting an input source with the AV1-2 key, audio and video from video devices are
output from the unit.
• To play back the playback device connected to the AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, it is necessary to
connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.20). When playing back the device,
switch the input source on TV to the component video input connected to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
75Ω
AM FM
ANTENNA
AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONITOR OUT
FRONT
R
L
M
I OUT
A
RC
L
R
HDMI
HDM
I
HDM
I
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
HDMI 1-4 jacks
Video device
Output jack of a video device
Input jack of the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Optical AV1 (COMPONENT + OPTICAL)
Coaxial AV2 (COMPONENT + COAXIAL)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONIT
O
COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2
COAXIAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
O
C
O
C
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2
COAXIAL
The unit (rear)
Video device
OR
Audio output
(Digital optical or coaxial)
AV1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV2 (COAXIAL) jack
Video output
(Component video)
AV1-2
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
1 2 3 4
Connecting playback devices
5 6 7 8
En 22
■ Analog video connection
Connect video devices to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (any of a
coaxial cable, an optical cable and stereo pin cable.) Input jacks of the unit (AV3-6) are
different depending on the audio input jacks of the video devices.
By selecting input source with the AV3-6 key, audio and video of video devices are
output from the unit.
• To play back the playback device connected to the AV3-6 (VIDEO) jacks, it is necessary to connect the TV
to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.20). When playing back the device, switch the input source on TV to
the composite video input connected to the unit.
■ Change the combination of input jacks (video/audio)
When an input jack of the unit does not match an output jack of a video device, select
another jack of the unit to match the jack of the video device. The Following connections
become available with this setting.
Necessary settings
As an example, the setting for connections, for which AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
is used for video signals and AV5 (AUDIO) jacks are used for audio signals, is shown
below.
Output jack of video device
Input jacks of the unit
Video Audio
Analog video
Coaxial AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Optical AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM
ANTENNA
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2
AV
OUT
M
COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ARC
VIDEO
AV 3 AV 4 AV 5
COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
R
L
AV 6
VIDEO
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OO
CC
L
R
L
R
VIDEO
VV
COAXIAL
R
L
OPTICAL
The unit (rear)
Audio output
(any of digital optical,
coaxial, analog stereo)
AV3-6 jacks
Video output
(Analog video)
Video device
OR
OR
Output jacks of a video device Input jacks of the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Optical HDMI 1-4
AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Coaxial HDMI 1-4 AV2-3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1-4
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
Component video Analog stereo
AV1-2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI
2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
MONITOR
O
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ARC
AV 5
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
AUDIO1
AV
OUT
AV 5
R
L
R
L
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
Video device
Audio output
(Analog stereo)
AV5 (AUDIO) jack
Video output
(Component video)
AV2
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jack
Continues to the
next page
1 2 3 4
Connecting playback devices
5 6 7 8
En 23
1 Complete the connections for external devices (such as a TV and
playback device), the power cable and so on, and then turn on the
unit and the TV.
2 Change the input source setting of the TV to the video from the unit.
3 Press AV2 to select “AV2” as the video input jack of the unit.
4 Press OPTION.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to select “Audio In.”
6 Press ENTER.
7 Press the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to select “AV5” as the input
source.
Input sources
HDMI1-4, AV1-2
Settings
HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO
8 Press OPTION.
All settings have been completed.
When switching the input source to “AV2” with the AV2 key, video and audio from
the video device are output from the unit.
Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player)
Connect audio devices (such as a CD player, MD player and so on) to the unit.
Select a correct connection depending on the output jacks of the audio devices
connected to the unit.
By selecting an input source with the AV1-6 key and AUDIO key, audio from audio
devices is output from the unit.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
6:
&
/
6/ 65
5
Audio In
OPTION
92 /
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV2
AV2
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV5
AV2
VO L.
Audio output jack of audio device Audio input jack of the unit
Optical
AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Coaxial AV2-3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV5-6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
H
75Ω
R OUT
AM
FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV
OUT
MONITOR OUT
O
MPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ARC
AV 5
R
L
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
AV 3
COAXIAL
(CD)
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 6
DOCK
AUDIO
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OO
CC
L
R
L
R
COAXIAL
R
L
OPTICAL
The unit (rear)
Audio output
(any of digital optical,
coaxial, analog stereo)
AV1-6 jacks
AUDIO jack
Audio device
OR
OR
1 2 3 4
Connecting playback devices
5 6 7 8
En 24
Connecting to the jack on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a
video camera and a game console. Be sure to stop the device and turn down the
volume before connecting it to the unit.
By selecting input source as “V-AUX” with the V-AUX key, audio and video from the
connected device are output from the unit.
• To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack.
• When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound
output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted.
Connect supplied indoor FM antenna and an AM antenna.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• From the AM antenna, take some wires, only the number needed for connections.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
VIDEO
PORTABLE
L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHTTONE CONTROL
BD
DVD
TV CD RADIO
PROGRAM
INPUT
V RL
R
L
V
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
Audio output
Video output
Audio output
Video camera
Portable audio
player
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
FRO
N
HDMI OUT
ARC
R
ANTENNA
75Ω
AM FM
The unit (rear)
FM antennaAM antenna
Press and hold
Insert Release
1 2 3 4
Connecting playback devices
5
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
6 7 8
En 25
Use AV OUT jacks to connect video and audio recording devices. Selected incoming
analog audio/video signals are output through AV OUT jacks.
• When recording video/audio of the video device, use AV5-6 jacks or VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of
the unit to connect video devices.
• When recording audio of the audio device, use any of AV5-6 jacks, AUDIO jacks or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO)
jacks of the unit to connect audio devices.
After all connections are complete, connect the power plug to the outlet.
• The figure of the power plug may differ depending upon regions.
6 Connecting recording devices
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
MONITOR O
U
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
AUDIO
AV
OUT
AV
OUT
L
R
L
R
V
V
Audio input
(Analog stereo)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio
device
Video input
(Analog video)
The unit (rear)
7 Connecting the power cable
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
L
R
Plug into a wall outlet
1 2 3 4 5 6
Connecting recording devices
7
Connecting the power cable
8
En 26
The YPAO microphone (supplied) detects the status of speaker
connections and the distance between these speakers and the
listening position, and adjusts the volume balance and the tone
settings automatically (YPAO: Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer).
• Be aware of the following when using YPAO.
- After completing the connection of a TV, speakers, and so on, start YPAO
measurement.
- The test tone is output at a high volume while measuring. Please take care that
the test tone does not frighten any small children. Also, avoid using YPAO at
night, so as to not make your neighbors troubled.
- Keep your room quiet while measuring.
- Do not connect headphones to the unit.
- YPAO can be performed by viewing the front display of the unit.
Preparation before using YPAO
1 Press RECEIVER to turn on the unit.
2 Turn on the TV, and then select the input source of
the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of
the unit.
3 Turn on the subwoofer, and then set the volume of
the subwoofer to half. The cross-over frequency is
set to maximum if it is present.
• When a subwoofer that supports the automatic standby function (turn off
automatically during no signals input) is used, disable the function before
going to the next step.
4 Set the YPAO microphone at the height of your ear in
your listening position. Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following display appears on the TV monitor and front
display.
• To cancel the measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone before
measuring or press the cursor key ( ) to select “Exit” and press ENTER.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RECEIVER
Cursor keys
8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position.
We recommend using a tripod to adjust the height. You can use the
tripod screws to fix the microphone in place.
The unit (front)
YPAO microphone
listening position
Ear height
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 27
Starting the measurement
Start the measurement by following these steps.
• YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the
room.
• While measuring, keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the room. It takes
approximately 3 minutes to finish this measurement.
1 Confirm that “Start” is selected, and then press
SETUP.
The measurement starts in 10 seconds. Press ENTER if you
want to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement, press RETURN to stop temporarily, press
ENTER, select “EXIT” and then press ENTER.
• To retry the measurement from the temporary stop, select “RETRY” and then
press ENTER.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If an error message (such as “E-1:No Front SP”) or a warning message
(such as “W-1:Out of Phase”) appears, refer to “Error messages” or
“Warning messages” (p.29, 30).
2 Confirm that “Save / Exit” is selected and then press
ENTER.
• To confirm the measurement result, select “Result.” For details, refer to the
“Confirming the measurement result” (p.28).
3 Confirm that “SAVE” is selected, and then press the
ENTER.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, press the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and then press ENTER.
4 Remove the YPAO microphone.
All settings for the speakers have been completed.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MU
TE
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
D
IRE
C
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
M
U
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
PO
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
P
L
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
RECEIVER
CO
DE
S
E
T
U
SB
A
U
DI
O
O
PTI
O
N
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
S
UR
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[ A ]
DOC
K
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
Cursor keys
CAUTION
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. Protect YPAO microphone from
high temperatures (such as near AV equipment) and direct sunlight.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 28
Confirming the measurement result
Confirm the YPAO measurement result.
1 After measurement, press the cursor keys to select
“Result,” and then press ENTER.
The following display appears.
1 Measurement items
2 Measurement result for each speaker
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item.
The red-box indicates the speaker that has a problem in the
following items. For details on remedy of each problem, refer to
“Warning messages” (p.30).
• The speaker indicated with red box shows that it may have a certain
problem. Check the connection or placement, and if necessary, perform
YPAO again referring “Warning messages” (p.30).
3 To return the previous screen after confirmation,
press ENTER or RETURN.
• (If no problem with the result) Press the cursor key ( )
to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then confirm that
“SAVE” is selected and press ENTER to finish the YPAO.
• (If some problem with the result) Press the cursor key
( ) to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then press
the cursor key ( ) to select “CANCEL” and ENTER. To
restart the YPAO measurement, select “Start.” To finish
the YPAO, select “Exit.”
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DISPL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
Red-boxed message indicates a speaker that has a problem.
Wiring
Displays the condition of the polarity of each connected
speaker.
“Normal”: Speakers are connected at the normal polarity. (+
and -)
“Reverse”: Speakers are connected at the opposite side of
normal polarity. (+ and -)
Size
Displays the size of the connected speakers.
“Large”: The connected speaker has the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively.
“Small”: The connected speaker does not have the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively.
The value displayed above “SWFR” describes the cross over
frequency of the subwoofer.
Distance
Displays the distance between connected speakers and the
listening position.
Level
Displays the result of the adjustment of output level of
connected speakers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 29
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message can be confirmed and controlled by viewing both a TV
monitor and the front display.
■ Procedure to exit YPAO
1 Check the contents of error message, and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor key ( ) to select “EXIT (Exit)” from the following
choices, and then press ENTER.
Choices: PROCEED (Proceed) (E-5, E-9 only), “RETRY (Retry),” “EXIT (Exit)”
3 Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Exit (Exit)” from the following
choices, and then press ENTER.
Choices: Start (Start), Exit (Exit)
4 Remove the YPAO microphone.
■ Cause and remedy for each error message
TV monitor Front display
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
E-1:NO FRNT SP
YPAO
VOL.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not
detected.
Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. After removing problems, turn on the unit, and
then perform YPAO again.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
Either of surround
speakers is not detected.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart YPAO for an accurate measurement. Selecting
“PROCEED (Proceed)” allows you to continue measuring, but may not achieve the optimal results.
We recommend selecting “RETRY (Retry)” or “EXIT (Exit)” to retry YPAO again from the beginning.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone
cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has
been canceled.
Select “PROCEED (Proceed)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to resume the measurement. Select “RETRY (Retry)” to restart the measurement from
first.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has
occurred.
Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. Perform YPAO again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 30
Warning messages
Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results. However, we recommend that you perform YPAO again for the optimal
speaker settings.
■ Cause and remedy for each warning message
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
W-1:PHASE
YPAO
VOL.
TV monitor Front display
The speaker indicator that has a
problem flashes.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
Any of the speaker cables
may be connected with the
reversed polarity (+/-).
a Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Wiring” (p.28).
b Check the connection of the speaker with warning.
c Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
d Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
e (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and reconnect the speaker. After reconnecting, perform YPAO again.
When using the speakers that are designed with reverse polarity for better performance, this warning may appear even if the speakers are connected
properly.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
Any of the speakers is
placed too far from the
listening position.
a Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Distance” (p.28).
b Check the placement of the speaker with warning.
c Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
d Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
e (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and relocate the speaker. After relocating, perform YPAO again.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are a significant
volume differences
between the speakers.
a Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Level” (p.28).
b Check the connection of the speaker with warning. Also check the use environment, or the volume of the subwoofer.
c Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
d Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER.
e (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER.
(If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER.
f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO.
g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and resolve the problem. After resolving the problem, perform YPAO again.
We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En 31
PLAYBACK
1 Turn on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.)
connected to the unit.
2 Use the Input selection keys to select the input
source.
3 Switch the input source on TV according to the type
of video signal (such as HDMI, Component video
signal) output from the playback device.
4 Play the external device selected as the input
source, or select a radio station.
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external
device.
For details on FM/AM tuning and playing the iPod, Bluetooth
devices or USB devices, refer to the following pages.
• Listening to FM/AM (p.38)
• Playing back songs with iPod (p.43)
• Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices (p.50)
• Playing back songs with USB storage devices (p.52)
5 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume level.
• Press MUTE to turn the mute on. Press MUTE again to turn the mute off.
• High-frequency/low-frequency output can be adjusted in the “Option” menu
(p.57) or with TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.7).
• To correct the volume differences between each input source, adjust the
parameter in “Volume Trim” of the “Option” menu (p.57).
Switching the sleep timer
Sleep timer function switches the unit to standby mode automatically
after a specified period of time has elapsed. Press SLEEP on the remote
control repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function as follows.
• The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on.
Switching the information displayed on
the front display
1 Press INFO on the remote control or front panel
repeatedly.
The information (such as the selected input, sound program,
surround decoder, FM/AM frequency) displayed on the front
display is switched.
■ Information for each input
The information displayed the front display varies depending on the
selected input.
Input sources except for TUNER, DOCK (for wired iPod) and
USB are selected:
TUNER is selected:
• When receiving Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only)
DOCK (for wired iPod) or USB is selected:
Basic playback procedure
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
OL
T
V C
H
I
NPUT
MUTE
S
CEN
E
E
NHAN
C
ER
DIRE
CT
FM
MEMO
R
Y
AM
PRESET
M
O
VIE
M
US
I
C
P
O
P-UP
MEN
U
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTIO
N
T
UNIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
SUR
. DE
CO
DE
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
[
A
]
INFO
VOLUME
MUTE
SLEEP
Input selection keys
120 min. 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. Off
Input
DSP Program Audio Decoder
Frequency DSP Program Audio Decoder
Program Service Program Type Radio Text Clock Time
DSP Program
Audio DecoderFrequency
Song Artist Album DSP Program Audio Decoder
En 32
With the SCENE function, an input source and registered settings
(the sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music
Enhancer, etc.) can be selected with a single key.
1 Press SCENE.
The registered settings on SCENE that you pressed are
reflected. When the unit is in standby mode, press this key to
turn it on.
Default settings for each SCENE are as follows.
Changing the settings for the SCENE
function
1 Do the following steps to select the settings that you
want to register for SCENE.
• Selecting the input source (p.31)
• Selecting the sound program (p.33)
• Enabling/disabling Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37)
• Enabling/disabling the SCENE synchronization function
(p.70)
2 Press and hold SCENE on the remote control or
front panel until “SET Complete” appears on the
front panel.
When the input source setting of each SCENE is changed, the
corresponding SCENE key setting on the remote control also
needs to be changed. Refer step 3 to configure the setting for
the remote control.
3 (If necessary) Press and hold the corresponding
SCENE key and input selection key together for
more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/
RECEIVER blinks twice.
• Apply the corresponding remote control code to the input selection key to
control the playback device with the unit’s remote control. For details on how
to apply the remote control code, refer to “Registering remote control codes
for external device operations” (p.75).
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
SCENE
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
SCENE Input
Sound program/
surround
decoder (p.33)
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
(p.37)
SCENE
synchronization
(p.70)
BD/DVD HDMI1 STRAIGHT Off On
TV AV4 STRAIGHT On On
CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off Off
RADIO TUNER 5ch Stereo On Off
When external devices, such as a TV or BD/DVD player
compatible with the HDMI control function, are connected to the
unit, the HDMI control functions are enabled on the unit and the
external devices and “SCENE” in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On” for the corresponding SCENE, operations of the external
device may be reflected by switching SCENE as follows.
• TV is turned on.
• TV is switched to a video input source that is connected to the unit.
• External device starts playback.
• The SCENE synchronization setting can be set for each SCENE. For details,
refer to the “SCENE” (p.70) in the “Setup” menu.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SET Complete
VOL.
En 33
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and sound
decoders. Sound programs can make sounds richer, be played on
the stereo and more. Choose a sound program that sounds best
with the source you are playing back.
Selecting suitable sound programs for movies (p.34)
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
Selecting suitable sound programs for music or stereo
playback (p.35)
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
Selecting the surround decoder (p.36)
Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
Switching to the straight decoding mode (p.37)
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to switch the straight decoding mode
between on and off.
Turning on the direct mode (p.37)
Press DIRECT repeatedly to switch the direct mode between on and
off.
Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37)
Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch Compressed Music
Enhancer between on and off. Compressed Music Enhancer can be
also switched between on and off in the “Option” menu (p.57).
• The settings for sound programs and the surround decoder can be configured in
“DSP” (p.65) in the “Setup” menu.
• The sound program can be applied separately to each input.
• When playing back the audio that is DTS Express or has over a 96 kHz sampling
rate, straight decoding mode (p.37) turns on automatically.
• The speaker indicator on the front display (p.8) can be used to confirm which jack
is outputting audio currently.
Enjoying the desired sound field effect
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MUTE
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
SLEE
P
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
MUTE
POP-UP
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
MOVIE
MUSIC
DIRECT
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
En 34
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
• When DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is played back, it is decoded by normal
DTS format.
■ Sound programs suitable for video contents (MOVIE)
Sound programs suitable for video contents, such as movies, TV programs and video
games are included.
❏ MOVIE
❏ ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as
Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal
movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie
productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches
cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range
providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive
sounds.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a
variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Programs
Sound program categories “CINEMA DSP” lights up
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action
and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts
emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and
right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the
separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing
effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words
and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after
long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a
classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program
produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and
studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the
voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the
center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to
offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting
games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects
makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing
for greater concentration.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a
more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of
scenes.
Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a
more clear and spatial sound field.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of
pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live
space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of
vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
En 35
■ Sound programs/stereo reproduction suitable for audio
contents (MUSIC)
Include suitable sound programs for listening to music sources such as CDs.
❏ CLASSICAL
❏ LIVE/CLUB
❏ STEREO
Hall in Munich
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finish as a normal standard for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating
a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
Hall in Vienna
This sound program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized
concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and
ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the
audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a seat in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a live rock music venue in Los Angeles, with
approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field in front of the stage in The Bottom Line, a once famous
New York jazz club. The venue can seat 300 people ranging from left to right
in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When
multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and
output from the front speakers. (CINEMA DSP is not used.)
5ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback
multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
En 36
■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
The CINEMA DSP 3D creates virtual speakers by using front
speakers, center speakers and surround speakers, which brings
you into a stereoscopic sound field.
When a sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 5ch stereo) is
selected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is turned on automatically in the
following situations:
• “Center” and “Surround” in the “Setup” menu are set to “Large” or
“Small” (p.62).
• “CINEMA DSP 3D” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (p.65).
• When headphones are connected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is not available.
■ Enjoying sound programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Without any surround speakers, only by using front side speakers,
the unit creates virtual speakers, which recreate the sound field
from the back automatically.
Select the sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 5ch stereo)
when surround speakers are not connected.
• When headphones are connected, the Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available.
Instead, SILENT CINEMA becomes effective (p.37).
Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround
decoder)
When using a surround decoder, audio sources can be played
back with up to 5.1-channel.
For details, refer to “Glossary” (p.84).
1 Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
By pressing SUR. DECODE repeatedly, the type of decoder
changes.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MUTE
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCER
SLEEP DIREC
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
POP-UP
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
SUR.DECODE
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
SBL SBR
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator lights up
Pro Logic
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources.
PL
II Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
II
decoder. This is suitable for movies.
PL
II Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
II
decoder. This is suitable for music.
PL
II Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic
II
decoder. This is suitable for games.
Neo:6 Cinema
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This
is suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Pro Logic
VOL.
SBL SBR
En 37
Playback without sound field effects
(straight decoding mode)
By using the straight decoding mode, sounds from each channel
included in input sources are output from each speaker without
sound field processing. When 2-channel sources such as CD are
selected, they are played back by stereo sound through the front
left and right speakers. When multi-channel playback sources are
selected, they are played back without applying sound field effects,
using an appropriate decoder.
1 Press STRAIGHT.
By pressing STRAIGHT repeatedly, the straight decoding
mode switches to enable and disable.
Playing back fidelity sound of the
selected source (direct mode)
When the direct mode is enabled, the circuitry regardless of
playback (such as the front display or CINEMA DSP) is disabled to
reduce noise and play back and reproduce original sound.
1 Press DIRECT.
By pressing DIRECT repeatedly, the direct mode switches to
enable and disable.
• When the direct mode is enabled, there are some restrictions as follows.
- Sound programs cannot be selected.
- Tone control cannot be adjusted.
- The “Option” menu and “Setup” menu cannot be operated.
- Front display screen gets dimmer for reducing noise (during no operation).
Playing back the compressed audio
dynamically (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound by adding depth
and width and creates dynamic playback closer to the original
sound. This mode can be used along with CINEMA DSP.
1 Press ENHANCER.
By pressing ENHANCER repeatedly, Compressed Music
Enhancer switches to enable and disable.
• Compressed Music Enhancer is not available for the following audio formats:
- Signals with a sampling rate over 48 kHz
- High Definition Audio bitstream
• Compressed Music Enhancer can be also turned on/off in the “Option” menu
(p.57).
Enjoying surround audio with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
Connect headphones to the PHONES jack, and then select sound
programs and surround decoders. Even when headphones are
connected, you can enjoy a sound field.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
S
LEE
P
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
DIRECT
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
L
R
DIRECT
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer is active.
En 38
When tuning a radio, select a frequency or a registered station.
• To tune into the radio station, connect the antenna in advance (p.24).
• When the radio cannot get good reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press FM or AM to select FM or AM to receive.
3 Select the frequency with the following keys.
TUNING: Selects a frequency.
Press and hold this key for approximately a second to search
for a station automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly with numbers (For
example, press “9,” “8,” “5” and “0” to select a station on
98.50 MHz.).
• “Wrong Station!” appears when a frequency is out of receivable range.
“TUNED” lights up when a broadcast is received from a
station.
“STEREO” lights up when stereo broadcast is received from a
station.
■ Receiving an FM broadcast that has a poor
signal
It may be possible to receive an unstable FM broadcast by
switching from stereo receiving to monaural receiving.
1 Press MODE.
By pressing MODE, the receiving mode is switched to
monaural or stereo.
Registering favorite stations (Preset
tuning)
Up to 40 FM/AM stations can be registered as preset stations.
Registered stations can be chosen easily by selecting the preset
numbers.
■ Registering FM stations automatically
Up to 40 FM stations with strong signals can be registered
automatically (Auto Preset).
• AM stations cannot be registered automatically. Use manual station preset (p.39).
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
Listening to FM/AM
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
10
ENT
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
CD
RADI
O
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
FM
AM
TUNING
TUNER
OPTION
MODE
Numeric keys
• FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on the country or region where
the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with
frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM Mode:Mono
VO L.
TUNED
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
Continues to the
next page
En 39
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Auto Preset.”
4 Press ENTER.
5 (If necessary) To change the preset number from
which to start the Auto Preset function, press
PRESET or the cursor keys.
Auto Preset starts in approximately 5 seconds after the preset
number is selected.
When the preset number is not selected, “READY” appears on
the display, and then Auto Preset starts in approximately
5 seconds.
Selecting a preset number
• To cancel the Auto Preset, press RETURN.
During Auto Preset
During registration
When Auto Preset is completed
The “Option” menu closes automatically when registration is
completed.
■ Registering stations manually
Select stations manually and register them to the preset numbers.
1 Tune the station that you want to register, referring
to “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.38).
2 Press MEMORY for 2 seconds or longer.
The station is registered automatically to the preset number
“01” for the first registration. The station will be registered to the
next preset number after the one registered most recently after
the second registration.
• To select the preset number for registration, press MEMORY once while
receiving the station that you want to register. Press PRESET or numeric
keys to select the preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a registered station
Choose the station that you want to listen to from stations that are
registered to the preset numbers.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
I
NPUT
MUTE
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
S
CEN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
AM
M
O
VIE
M
US
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TOP
MENU
PO
P-UP
MEN
U
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
USB
A
UDI
O
O
PTIO
N
S
E
TU
P
T
UNIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
SUR
. DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A ]
DOC
K
TUNER
PRESET
ENTER
RETURN
MEMORY
Cursor keys
Auto Preset
OPTION
VO L.
01:FM 87.50MHz
READY
VO L.
02:FM 87.50MHz
READY
VO L.
Currently selected preset number
02:FM 98.10MHz
SEARCH
VO L.
STEREO
TUNED
C
02:FM98.50MHz
VOL.
Auto Preset
FINISH
VO L.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
VOL.
Preset number
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STEREO
TUNED
01:Empty
VOL.
Empty, or the frequency currently registered
Continues to the
next page
En 40
2 Press PRESET to select the preset number.
After pressing PRESET once, numeric keys can be used for
inputting the preset number (01 to 40) directly.
• When no stations are registered, “No presets” appears on the display.
• When an invalid preset number is input, “Wrong Num.” appears on the
display.
• When the preset number that is not registered yet is entered, “Empty”
appears on the display.
■ Clearing a registered station
Clear a radio station (preset station) registered to a preset number.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to display “Clear
Preset.”
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the preset
number that you want to clear, and then press
ENTER.
To clear multiple preset numbers, repeat the same procedure.
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data
System data such as “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio
Text,” “Clock Time” when receiving Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information:
“Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time.”
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend that you use the automatic preset tuning to tune into the
Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.38).
2 Press INFO repeatedly until the desired information
is displayed.
Information on the display changes as you press the key. The
kind of information is displayed for a while and then the
information is displayed.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCER
SLEEP DIREC
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
AM
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MUTE
10
ENT
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
TUNER
PRESET
MEMORY
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
02:FM87.50MHz
VOL.
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
Clear Preset
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM 98.50MHz
CLEAR
VO L.
STEREO
TUNED
Type of information Description
Program Service
Displays the name of the Radio Data System
program service currently being received.
Program Type
Displays the type of the Radio Data System program
currently being received.
Radio Text
Displays the information on the Radio Data System
program currently being received.
Clock Time Displays the current time.
DSP Program Displays the currently selected sound program.
Audio Decoder Displays the currently selected surround decoder.
Frequency Displays the received tuner frequency.
Continues to the
next page
En 41
Front display (when “Program Type” selected)
• “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when “Program Type,” “Radio
Text,” or “Clock Time” is displayed. That shows this unit is receiving data (or
stopping receiving data). If the data is receivable, the corresponding information is
displayed after a while.
• “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” do not appear
when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.
■ Automatic traffic information reception
When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically search for and
receive transmission from traffic information broadcast stations.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select
“TrafficProgram.”
4 Press ENTER to start the search function.
The transmission search will begin upward from the current
frequency in approximately 5 seconds. Or, when the status
indicator reads “READY,” you can begin the search
immediately by pressing ENTER.
• By pressing RETURN right before or during a search, it will return to the
“Option” menu.
• When the status is “READY,” use the cursor keys ( / ) to start a search in
the specified direction. If no operation is performed for more than 5 seconds,
a search automatically starts upward.
- Cursor key ( ): Searches upward from the current frequency.
- Cursor key ( ): Searches downward from the current frequency.
When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the display and
the “Option” menu will close.
• If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not Found” will appear on the
display, and the “Option” menu will shortly close.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
M
U
TE
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SO
UR
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
C
ODE SET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
TUNER
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
CLASSICS
9850
VOL.
Frequency
Program Type
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
MUTE
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VOL.
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
MUTE
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
TrafficProgram
OPTION
VOL.
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
TP FM 87.50MHz
READY
VOL.
Status
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
MUTE
ENHANCER
iPod
CHARGE
R
TP FM101.30MHz
FINISH
VOL.
Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency)
En 42
Combining audio from the radio with
video from an external device
While listening to the radio, favorite videos can be output on a TV
monitor.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source, and then choose the station that you want to
listen to.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Video Out.”
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired
input video source.
Selectable video inputs
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
• Switch the input source on TV depending the settings to play back the video.
HDMI1-4 A video signal input from HDMI1-4 is output.
AV1-6 A video signal input from AV1-6 is output.
V-AUX
A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the
front display panel is output.
Off (default) No video signals input from external devices is output.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCER
SLEEP DIREC
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MUTE
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
TUNER
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
Video Out
OPTION
VO L.
Video;;;;;;Off
TUNER
VO L.
Video;;;;HDMI1
TUNER
VO L.
En 43
By using the USB cable supplied with iPod, optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-12) or optional Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10), play back songs from
connected iPod with the unit.
• In this manual, both iPod and iPhone are collectively represented as “iPod.” When there is no explanation
that is specific to either of them, “iPod” means both iPod and iPhone.
• Some functions may not be available depending on types or versions of iPod, or depending on types of
docks.
Functional differences depending on the way of connection
* The video signal is output from the VIDEO jack of MONITOR OUT on the rear of the unit.
Connecting an iPod
■ Using a USB cable to connect an iPod
Connect the iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
Features
• Enjoying clear sounds by transmitting the digital audio signals input from iPod.
• Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control.
• Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a TV monitor.
Supported iPod
iPod touch, iPod nano (2 gen. to 6 gen.), iPod classic, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone
Procedure
Connect an iPod as follows.
1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Playing back songs with iPod
USB cable supplied
with iPod
Yamaha iPod universal
dock
(such as YDS-12)
Yamaha iPod wireless
system
(YID-W10)
Audio output ✓✓✓
Video output — ✓*—
Operation with
remote control of
the unit
✓✓—
Operation with
iPod
✓✓✓
Operation on TV
monitor
✓✓—
Charging ✓✓✓
Charging during
standby mode
— ✓✓
Supported iPod
iPod touch
iPod nano (2 gen. to
6gen.)
iPod classic
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod with color display
iPod with click wheel
iPod mini
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
Continues to the
next page
En 44
2 Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front
panel.
3 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start
playback.
• To operate with a TV monitor (p.46)
• To operate with iPod itself (p.49)
• Video signals cannot be output using the USB cable supplied with iPod.
• If noises are heard while using iPhone, change the position of the iPhone.
■ Using the iPod dock to connect an iPod
Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod universal
dock.
Features
• Playing back not only songs but also video.
• Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control.
• Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a
TV monitor.
Supported iPod
iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPod with color
display, iPod with click wheel, iPod mini, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS,
iPhone 3G, iPhone
Procedure
Connect an iPod as follows. Refer to the manual for iPod dock also.
• For connecting iPhone, use the YDS-12.
1 Turn the unit to the standby mode, and then connect
the iPod dock to the DOCK jack.
Keep the iPod dock as far away from the unit as possible.
2 Connect the iPod to the iPod dock, and then turn on
this unit.
3 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start
playback.
• To operate with a TV monitor (p.46)
• To operate with iPod itself (p.49)
• When the iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod can be charged.
You can set whether or not to charge the iPod when the unit is in the standby
mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.58) on the “Option” menu.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
USB
DOC
K
TONE CONTROL
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
USB
INPUT
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Connected
VO L.
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
DOCK
Yamaha iPod universal dock
The unit (rear)
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
iPodconnected
DOCK
VOL.
En 45
■ Using the iPod wireless system to connect
an iPod
Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod wireless
system.
Features
• Connecting iPod to the unit wirelessly and playing back audio source
in real time without reducing the quality.
• Volume level or power-on/off operation of the unit can be linked
synchronized with operations of iPod itself.
Supported iPod
iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPhone4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
Procedure
Connect an iPod as follows. The iPod can be controlled using iPod
itself. Refer to the manual for iPod wireless system also.
1 Disconnect the power cable plug from the outlet,
and then connect the iPod wireless system
(receiver) to the DOCK jack.
Keep the iPod wireless system as far away from the unit as
possible.
2 Connect the power cable plug to the outlet.
3 Connect the iPod to the iPod wireless system
(transmitter).
Wait for a while until the following display appears on the front
display.
4 Select the content with the iPod, and then start
playback.
The unit turns on automatically, and then “DOCK” is selected
as the input source.
• The video or content list of iPod cannot be displayed on a TV monitor.
• You can set whether operations for iPod link with operations for the unit
(turning on/off, selecting input sources, and adjusting volume level) in “iPod
Interlock (Interlock)” (p.59) on the “Option” menu. When the interlock
function is set to “Off,” operations for the unit such as turning on and
selecting the input source, should be controlled manually.
• When putting a transmitter connected to the iPod on a receiver, iPod is
charged automatically. You can set whether or not to charge iPod when the
unit is in standby mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.58) on the “Option” menu.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
DOC
K
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
DOCK
A
B
1
2
3
Yamaha iPod wireless
system (Receiver)
The unit (rear)
CAUTION
• When using iPod to adjust the volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud,
which causes damage to the unit and speakers. In this case, remove the iPod
from the iPod wireless system (transmitter) immediately. Set the restriction for
the maximum volume level in “Max Volume” on “Setup” menu to prevent
excessively loud playback.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
iPodconnected
VOL.
En 46
Controlling while watching a TV monitor
When connecting iPod with a USB cable or iPod dock, iPod can be
controlled with the TV monitor.
• To operate an iPod on a TV monitor, connect the unit and TV with an HDMI cable,
and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of
the unit before operation.
• An iPod connected to the iPod wireless system cannot be operated on a TV
monitor.
1 Select the input source to which the iPod is
connected.
When using the USB cable to connect the iPod:
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
When using the iPod dock to connect the iPod:
Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
The following display is for the USB input source.
• When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the iPod is
connected to the unit properly.
2 Press the cursor keys to select the content, and then
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing
view appears.
• Press RETURN or the cursor key ( ) to return to the previous screen.
• (When using the iPod dock) To play back the video stored on iPod, connect
the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. When playing back, switch the
input source on TV to the composite video input.
• (When using the iPod dock) While playing back video stored on iPod,
switch the input source on TV to the HDMI input connected to the unit to
display Browse view or Now Playing view.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
USB
Cursor keys
En 47
■ Browse view
1 Play icon
Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.48) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 List name
3 Content list
List of iPod contents is displayed. Press the cursor keys to select the
content, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Current menu number/Numbers of all menu items
5 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to execute
the selection.
■ Now Playing view
1 Play icon
Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.48) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 Song information
The name of an artist, an album and a song and elapsed time/remaining
time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item to be
scrolled.
3 Album image
4 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
• iPod can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote control
(p.48).
• If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling iPod viewing
only the front display, press the cursor key ( ) to return to control screen.
Menu Explanation
10 Pages Up Goes 10 pages backwards.
1 Page Up
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Down Goes 10 pages forwards.
Return Returns to the previous display.
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view. When
playing no contents, this menu is not available.
Screen Off
Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to
display the Now Playing view while song or video
content is being played back. If no content is being
played back, the Browse view is displayed.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
M
U
TE
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SO
UR
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
C
ODE SET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
Menu Explanation
Playback
Control
Starts or pauses playback.
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
Browse Switches the display to the Browse view.
Screen Off
Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or
RETURN to return to the Now Playing view.
En 48
■ Controlling with the remote control
Without using “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view, iPod
can be operated directly with the remote control.
■ Shuffle/repeat playback
Make a setting for playing iPod in random order or repeatedly.
1 Select “USB” or “DOCK” as the input source, and
then press OPTION.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat.”
3 Press ENTER.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu.
4 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the setting.
5 Press OPTION to close the menu.
Available remote
control keys
Explanations
External
device
operation keys
Starts playing back the selected song.
Pauses playback.
Stops playback.
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
Skips to the beginning of the now playing song,
or to the previous playing song.
Skips to the next song.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
USB
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat;;;;;Off
DOCK
VO L.
Items Parameters Explanations
Shuffle
Off Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs
Plays back songs in random order.
Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.47).
Albums
Plays back albums in random order.
Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.47).
Repeat
Off Turns off the repeat function.
One
Plays back a song repeatedly.
Repeat One icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.47).
All
Plays back all songs in a directory.
Repeat All icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.47).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat
;;;;;One
DOCK
VO L.
En 49
Controlling by iPod itself
Control iPod to play contents.
1 Press MODE.
The display on the TV monitor disappears, and then operations
can be controlled by the iPod.
Press MODE again to return to the TV display (the Browse
view.)
2 Select the content with the iPod, and then start
playback.
For details on operation with the iPod, refer to the operation
manual of your iPod.
■ Controlling with the remote control
iPod can be operated directly with the remote control.
Available remote
control keys
Explanations
Cursor keys Selects the content.
ENTER/
Cursor key ( )
Confirms the selected menu.
RETURN/
Cursor key ( )
Returns to the previous menu.
External
device
operation keys
Starts or pauses playing back the selected song.
Stops playback.
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
Skips to the beginning of the now playing song,
or to the previous playing song.
Skips to the next song.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCER
SLEEP DIREC
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
TOP
MEN
U
POP-UP
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
S
E
TU
P
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MUTE
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 50
Use an optional Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as
YBA-10) to play back songs with Bluetooth devices. Refer to the
manual for the Bluetooth receivers or your Bluetooth devices also.
This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
Bluetooth profile.
• When connecting your Bluetooth device to a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for
the first time, it is necessary to do pairing (registration for matching two Bluetooth
devices.) Once pairing is completed, communication between the Bluetooth device
and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is established by only connecting them.
Therefore, when Bluetooth devices are connected, they need to be paired with the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver
1 Turn the unit to standby mode, and then connect the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver to the DOCK jack.
Keep the distance from the unit to the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver as far as possible.
2 Turn on the unit.
Pairing Bluetooth devices
When your Bluetooth device is connected to a Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver for the first time, or the pairing settings are deleted, it
is necessary to do pairing.
• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to
eight Bluetooth devices. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing setting for the
device which has not been used for the longest period will be deleted.
1 Press DOCK to select the “DOCK” as the input
source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth device, and then set to the
pairing mode.
3 Press OPTION and then press the cursor keys ( / )
repeatedly to select “Pairing,” and then press
ENTER.
The searching for the device starts. When the Bluetooth device
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, the name of
device (such as “YBA-10 YAMAHA”) appears on the Bluetooth
device list.
• Press RETURN to cancel the searching.
• Instead of the step 3, it is also possible to press and hold MEMORY to start
the searching. To cancel the searching, press MEMORY again.
Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
M
U
TE
TV
TV
V
O
L
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SO
UR
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
C
ODE SET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
MEMORY
OPTION
Cursor keys
DOCK
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
75Ω
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM FM
ANTENNA
VIDEO
AV 1
OPTICAL
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD) (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
DOCK
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
The unit (rear)
Searching...
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
En 51
4 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from
the Bluetooth device list, and then enter a pass key
“0000.”
When the pairing is completed, “Completed” appears.
• Depending on Bluetooth devices, “BT connected” appears after pairing. In
this case, at the same time with pairing, wired connection is also completed.
Therefore, only by starting playback with the Bluetooth device, audio output
from the unit automatically.
5 Press OPTION to close the menu.
Playing back songs by connecting to the
Bluetooth device
When pairing is completed, perform the wireless connection
between the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver. While connecting, when playback is started with the
Bluetooth device, audio is output from the unit.
• Depending on the Bluetooth device, a wireless connection is established
automatically by controlling the Bluetooth device. In this case, following steps from
2-3 is unnecessary.
1 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to select
“Connect,” and then press ENTER.
When the wireless connection is completed, “BT connected”
appears.
• When some Bluetooth devices are paired with the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver, the Bluetooth device, which has the Bluetooth function enabled and
was connected most recently, is automatically connected to the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver. When the device wireless audio receiver is
connected to another device, disable the Bluetooth function of the device or
connect them by operating Bluetooth device.
• ”Not found” appears when the wireless connection is not established.
Confirm the following, and then retry the connection.
- Both the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver are
paired.
- The Bluetooth device is turned on, and the Bluetooth function of that device
is set to enable.
- The Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) from the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
4 Play back songs with the Bluetooth device.
• Select “Disconnect” in step 3 to disconnect the wireless connection.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Completed
DOCK
VOL.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
DOCKDOCK
ENTER
OPTION
Cursor keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
BTconnected
DOCK
VOL.
En 52
When a USB device is connected to the unit, audio files in the
device, such as WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4
AAC, can be played back.
• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 48 kHz for USB storage
devices.
Connecting a USB storage device
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT
32 format, except USB HDDs). Refer to the manual for your USB
device also.
1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on
the front panel.
• Confirm that the USB storage device is facing the correct way when inserted
into the USB port.
• For details on connecting an iPod, refer to “Using a USB cable to connect an
iPod” (p.43).
• When connecting the USB storage device that contents many data files, it
may takes long time to load the files. During loading files, “Loading…” is
displayed on the front panel and TV monitor.
Controlling while watching a TV monitor
While watching a TV monitor, selecting songs and playback are
operated.
• To operate a USB storage device, connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable,
and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of
the unit before operation.
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
• When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the USB
storage device is connected to the unit properly.
2 Press the cursor keys to select a folder (directory) or
a song, and then press ENTER.
After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing
view appears.
• Press RETURN or the cursor key ( ) to return to the previous screen.
• Files that are not compatible with the unit are not displayed.
Playing back songs with USB storage devices
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
INFO MEMORY
TONE CONTROL
BD
DVD
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
USB
INPUT
YPAO MIC
En 53
■ Browse view
1 Play icon
Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.54) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 List name
3 Song list
The list of songs and folders is displayed (with up to 32 characters). Press
the cursor keys to select a song, and then press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
4 Current song number/Numbers of all songs
5 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
■ Now Playing view
1 Play icon
Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.54) and playback
status (playback/pause) are displayed.
2 Song information
The name of an artist, an album and a song tagged with the file and
elapsed time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an
item to be scrolled.
3 Operation menu icon
Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
• USB devices can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote
control (p.54).
• If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling contents on
the USB storage device viewing only the front display, press the cursor key ( ) to
return to control screen.
Menus Explanations
10 Pages Up 10 pages backwards.
1 Page Up
Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Down Goes 10 pages forwards.
Return Returns to the previous display.
Now Playing
Switches the display to the Now Playing view.
When playing no songs, this menu is not available.
Screen Off
Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to
display the Now Playing view while song or video
content is being played back. If no content is being
played back, the Browse view is displayed.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
Menus Explanations
Playback
Control
Starts or pauses playback.
Skips to the beginning of the next song.
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
Browse Switches the display to the Browse view.
Screen Off
Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or
RETURN to the Now Playing view.
En 54
■ Controlling with the remote control
Without using the “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view,
USB devices can be operated directly with the remote control.
■ Repeat/random playback
Make a setting for playing a USB device repeatedly or in random
order.
• When connecting an iPod with a USB cable, the settings of shuffle playback are
available in addition to the repeat playback (p.48).
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Repeat.”
4 Press ENTER.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the setting.
6 Press OPTION to close the menu.
Enables remote
control keys
Explanation
External
device
operation keys
Starts playing back the selected song.
Pauses playback.
Stops playback.
Searches backwards, while the button is
pressed.
Searches forwards, while the button is pressed.
Skips to the beginning of the song now playing,
or to the song previously playing.
Skips to the next song.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
56
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
TOP
MEN
U
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
USB
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat
OPTION
VO L.
Items Parameters Explanations
Repeat
Off Turns off the repeat function.
Single
Plays back a song repeatedly.
Repeat Single icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.53).
All
Plays back all songs in a folder (directory).
Repeat All icon appears on the Now
Playing view (p.53).
Random
Plays back songs in random order.
Random icon appears on the Now Playing
view (p.53).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat
;;;;;Off
USB
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Repeat
;;Single
USB
VO L.
En 55
Combining a song from a USB storage
device (iPod) with video from an external
device
While listening to a song from a USB device, favorite videos can be
output on the TV monitor.
1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source, and
then play back your desired song.
2 Press OPTION.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Video Out.”
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired
input video source.
Selectable video inputs
6 Press OPTION to finish this operation.
• When the Browse view and Now Playing view is displayed on a TV monitor, close
the screen with “ .”
• “Video Out” is also available for iPod connected to the USB port.
• Switch the input source on TV depending the settings to play back the video.
Switch the input source on TV to the HDMI input connected to the unit to display
Browse view or Now Playing view.
HDMI1-4 A video signal input from HDMI1-4 is output.
AV1-6 A video signal input from AV1-6 is output.
V-AUX
A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the
front display panel is output.
Off (default) No signal is output.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
CO
DE
S
ET
AU
DI
O
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
TV
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
USB
OPTION
Cursor keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Video Out
OPTION
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Video;;;;;;Off
USB
VO L.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Video;;;;V-AUX
USB
VO L.
En 56
Depending on the input source, configure settings for the function
related to playback. An operation for settings is possible with only
the front display without using a TV monitor. Therefore, settings can
be changed easily as needed.
• To operate the “Option” menu on the TV monitor, connect the unit and a TV with an
HDMI cable, and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI
OUT jack of the unit before operation.
1 Press OPTION.
Front display
TV monitor
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired
setting, and then press ENTER.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous screen.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the setting.
4 Press OPTION to finish the setting.
Available settings in Option menu
• Only the available settings that can be applied to the selected input are displayed.
Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu)
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
OLUME
ENHANCER
S
LEE
P
D
IRECT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
M
U
S
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
T
O
P
M
ENU
P
OP-UP
MENU
DISP
L
A
Y
A
A
SOU
R
CE
RE
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
E
T
U
SB
A
U
DI
O
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
INPUT
MUTE
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
D
E
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Tone Control
OPTION
VO L.
Item Description Page
Tone Control
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-
frequency range of sounds.
57
Adaptive DRC
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum
to minimum) is adjusted automatically in
conjunction with adjusting the volume level.
57
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music
Enhancer.
57
Volume Trim
Adjusts the differences of the volume levels
when switching the input source.
57
Signal Info
Displays information on the current video and
audio signal.
58
Audio In
Combines video from the selected input
source with audio input from other jacks.
22
Video Out
Combines audio of the TUNER or USB input
with video from other input.
42, 55
Auto Preset
Registers FM stations with strong signals
automatically in the preset numbers (up to 40).
38
Clear Preset Deletes the registered stations. 40
Traffic Program
(U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically
searches for traffic information with the Radio
Data System.
41
Repeat
Sets repeat playback of an iPod or USB
device.
48, 54
Shuffle Sets shuffle playback of an iPod. 48
Standby Charge
Sets whether or not to charge an iPod while
the unit is in standby mode.
58
iPod Interlock
Sets whether operations for the iPod
connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver
are in conjunction with operations for the unit.
59
Pairing
Pairs Bluetooth devices with the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver.
50
Connect/
Disconnect
Connects or disconnects a wireless
connection between Bluetooth devices with
the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
51
En 57
■ Tone Control
Adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) of sounds output from the front speakers. When headphones are connected,
adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds
output from headphones.
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to all input sources)
Choices
High frequency range (Treble), Low-frequency range (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to + 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
Bypass (0.0 dB)
• When you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well.
The tone control can also be adjusted with the keys on the front panel (p.7).
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
b Press PROGRAM to adjust the setting.
■ Adaptive DRC
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in
conjunction with adjusting the volume level.
When it is set to “On,” it is useful for listening to playback at low volume at night.
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to all input sources)
Settings
When it is set to “On,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low level volume, and
becomes wide at a high level volume.
■ Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37).
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to each input source)
Settings
• Compressed Music Enhancer can be enabled/disabled with ENHANCER on the remote control as well.
■ Volume Trim
Corrects the volume differences between each input source. Adjust the parameter to
reduce any change in volume when switching between input sources.
Input sources
All (the setting is applied to each input source)
• Adjusted value is separately applied to the selected input.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically
On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically
Input LevelInput Level
Volume: highVolume: low
Output Level
Output Level
On
Off
On
Off
Off Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
On Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
En 58
■ Signal Info
Displays information on the current video and audio signals.
Input sources
HDMI1-4, AV1-4, and the input source set as a TV audio input when ARC is used
Items
■ Procedure to switch the items on the front display.
1 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to switch the display of information on the front display.
Front display
• The list of all signal information is displayed on a TV monitor.
■ Standby Charge
Sets whether or not to charge an iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless
audio receiver while the unit is in standby mode.
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
Settings
• When iPod is connected to the unit with a USB cable, iPod cannot be charged while the unit is in standby
mode.
Format
(FORMAT)
Audio signal format.
When this unit is unable to detect a digital signal, it automatically
switches to an analog input.
Channel
(CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/ surround/
LFE).
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels
and LFE.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of
channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.
Sampling
(SAMPL)
The number of samples taken per second when converting an analog
signal into a digital signal.
Bitrate
(B RATE)
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Input
(V IN)
Video input signal format
Output
(V OUT)
Video output signal format.
Message
(V MSG)
Error messages about HDMI. This item appears only when error
concerning HDMI occurs.
HDCP Error (HDCP Error):
The connected TV is not compliant to the High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection (HDCP). Make sure that the HDCP compliant TV is
connected.
Device Over (Device Over):
The number of devices connected to HDMI OUT jack exceeded the
limitation. Reduce the number of the connected devices.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Dolby D
FORMAT
VO L.
Selected item Signal information
On (Default) Charges iPod when the unit is in standby mode.
Off Does not charge iPod when the unit is in standby mode.
En 59
■ iPod Interlock (Interlock)
Sets whether operations for the iPod connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver are
in linked with operations for the unit.
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
• This setting is available only when the iPod wireless audio receiver is connected.
❏ Power & Input (Pwr&Input)
Sets the operation for iPod related to the operation for the unit when adjusting the
volume level, such as being turned on and selecting the input source.
Settings
❏ Volume
Sets whether the operation for iPod relates to the operation for the unit when adjusting
the volume level.
Settings
Off Turns off the interlock function.
On (Default)
Turns on the interlock function. When starting playback with the iPod,
the unit is turned on, and then “DOCK” is selected as the input source.
When a few minutes pass after playback is stopped, the unit goes into
standby mode.
Off Turns off the interlock function.
On (Default)
Turns on the interlock function. When adjusting the volume level with an
iPod, the volume level of the unit is also adjusted.
En 60
CONFIGURATIONS
The settings of the unit can be changed from the “Setup” menu
displayed on the TV screen.
• Connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable to display the “Setup” menu. If the
TV is not connected with an HDMI cable, reconnect it with an HDMI cable.
1 Press SETUP.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the menu you
want to configure.
• Menus can be selected while the menu cursor is displayed (white box around
the menu icon). When configuring the settings, press RETURN repeatedly to
be able to select menus.
• For details on settings in the “Setup” menu, refer to the “Setup menu list”
(p.61).
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item (p.61)
and press ENTER.
• When pressing ENTER to select an item that has a folder icon ( ), a detail
setting menu is displayed. Press RETURN to close the detail settings menu
and return to the previous menu screen.
4 Press the cursor keys ( / / / ) to adjust the
setting and press ENTER.
• Operation procedures vary depending on selected items. For details, refer to
the directions for each setting item.
5 Press SETUP to close the “Setup” menu.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
D
IRE
C
T
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESET
M
O
VIE
MUS
I
C
BD
D
VD
MUT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-UP
M
ENU
DI
S
P
L
A
Y
A
A
SOURC
E
RE
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
E
T
USB
AUDI
O
O
PTI
O
N
T
UNIN
G
S
TRAIGHT
SUR
.
DE
CO
DE
I
NPUT
M
UTE
9
0
1
0
ENT
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
MO
D
E
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
T
UNE
R
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
Cursor keys
When the HDMI control function is enabled on both the unit and
a TV that supports the HDMI control, the TV may automatically
operate as follows when SETUP is pressed.
• The TV turns on.
• The video input on the TV is switched to the HDMI input connected
to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu is displayed on the TV screen.
Menu items Selected item
Selected menu Current settings and folders
En 61
Setup menu list
Menu Item Description Page
Speaker
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 62
Center Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker. 62
Surround Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers. 62
Subwoofer
Phase Selects the phase of the subwoofer signals. 62
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component produced from speakers set to “Small.” 62
Extra Bass Selects the speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 63
Distance Separately adjusts the distance between each speaker and the listening position respectively. 63
Level Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. 63
Equalizer Selects an equalizer type. 63
Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. 64
Sound
Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output. 64
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for the audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. 65
Max Volume Specify the maximum volume level that can be adjusted by VOLUME on the remote control. 65
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 65
DSP
CINEMA DSP 3D Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 65
Program Selects and adjusts a sound program and a decoder. 66
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name. 68
Auto Power Down Selects the amount of time after no operation is done that the unit enters standby. 68
Dimmer Reduces the brightness of the front display. 68
Short Message Turns the short messages displayed on the TV screen on or off. 68
Memory Guard Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the “Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE. 69
HDMI
HDMI Control
TV Audio Input Selects the input source that receives audio signals from a TV. 70
ARC Turns the Audio Return Channel function (ARC) on or off. 70
Standby Sync Selects the interlocked operation of the unit when the TV is turned off. 70
SCENE Selects whether or not to interlock an external device connected to this unit when selecting the appropriate SCENE. 70
Audio Output Specifies where audio signal is output. 70
Standby Through Specifies whether or not to transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode. 71
Language Selects the language used for menus and messages output from the unit and displayed on the TV screen. 71
En 62
Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker)
Adjust parameters for speakers manually.
■ Configuration
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters.
• When specifying the speaker size, set the speaker size to “Large” for each speaker with a 16 cm or larger
woofer diameter, or to “Small” for a 16 cm or smaller woofer diameter.
❏ Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers.
Settings
• When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” “Large” is automatically selected.
❏ Center
Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker.
Settings
❏ Surround
Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers.
Settings
❏ Subwoofer
Set whether or not to use a subwoofer.
Settings
“Phase,” “Bass Cross Over” and “Extra Bass” can be set only when “Subwoofer” is set
to “Use.”
■ Phase
Settings
• If the bass audio is lacking or unclear, the audio may be improved by changing the phase of the subwoofer.
■ Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.”
Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front
speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (Default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
Large Select this when large front speakers are connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when small front speakers are connected. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency components.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when a small center speaker is connected. The subwoofer
(or front speakers) will produce center channel low-frequency
components.
None
Select this when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will
produce center channel audio.
Large Select this when large surround speakers are connected.
Small (Default)
Select this when small surround speakers are connected. The
subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround channel low-
frequency components.
None
Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front
speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. When set to
“None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Use (Default)
Select this when a subwoofer is connected to the unit. During playback,
the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel and bass audio from other channels.
None
Select this when no subwoofer is connected to the unit. The front
speakers will produce bass frequency audio.
Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
En 63
■ Extra Bass
Specifies a speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• When “Front” is set to “Small,” “Extra Bass” is automatically set to “Off.”
■ Distance
Separately adjusts the timing at which each speaker produce audio so that sounds from
the speaker reach the listening position at the same time.
Submenu
• The default setting of units of length differs depending on your country or region.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) *In 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default setting
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
■ Level
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
■ Equalizer
Selects an equalizer type.
“YPAO:Flat,” “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” can be set after performing YPAO.
Settings
■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer
1 Select “Graphic EQ” in “Equalizer,” and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a speaker to adjust, and then press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a frequency you want to adjust.
Choices
63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1.0 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/16.0 kHz
4 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default setting
0.0 dB
• Repeat steps 3-4 to adjust the tone to your liking.
• Press RETURN or the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to return to select a speaker to be adjusted
(step 2).
5 Use the cursor keys ( / ) and select “EXIT,” and then press ENTER to finish
“Equalizer.”
Off (Default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or
the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel low-
frequency components.
Meter Shows units of length in meters.
Feet Shows units of length in feet.
Through (Default) Disables the equalizer.
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality manually. For details,
refer to “Adjusting the graphic equalizer.”
YPAO:Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each speaker.
YPAO:Front Sets the characteristics of each speaker to match the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural acoustics.
En 64
■ Test Tone
Turns the test tone generator on or off. When this setting is set to “On,” the volume
balance settings for each speaker can be adjusted while listening to the output sound in
other speaker settings (such as “Level” or “Graphic EQ”).
Settings
Configuring the settings of audio output signals
(Sound)
Configuring the settings of audio output signals.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function).
❏ Auto
When connected to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts audio output timing if the TV
supports an automatic lipsync function. If necessary, fine adjustment of the audio output
timing is possible. The difference between the result of auto delay and the fine
adjustments is displayed to the right of “Offset.”
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default setting
0 ms
❏ Manual
Manually adjusts the correction time.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default setting
0 ms
Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.
On
Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced
constantly.
En 65
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and
DTS) signal playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Specifies the maximum volume level that is adjustable with VOLUME on the remote
control or VOLUME on the front panel.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default setting
+16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP)
Configuring the settings of sound programs and surround decoders.
• Configurable items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
Turns CINEMA DSP 3D (p.36) on or off. When CINEMA DSP 3D is set to On, the
CINEMA DSP 3D mode automatically turns on in a sound program (except for 2ch
Stereo and 5ch Stereo).
Settings
• This setting can be set when the selected sound program supports CINEMA DSP.
Maximum (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
(Minimum) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet
environment, such as at night, for bit stream signals except for Dolby
TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on
input signal information.
Off (Default)
The volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby
mode.
On
Makes the initial volume Mute or -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB
increments). (This setting is only available when setting a volume lower
than Max Volume.)
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On (Default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
En 66
■ Program
Select and adjust a sound program and decoder. Select a sound program of which you
want to change the settings, and then set the parameters for each item. The sound
program is switched at this time.
■ Procedure
1 Press the cursor keys to select “Program” and then press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program of which you want change
the settings, and then press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item of which you want to change the
items, and then press ENTER.
4 Press the cursor keys to adjust the parameters, and then press ENTER.
5 If necessary, repeat step 3 to 4 to set other items.
6 Press SETUP to finish “Program.”
• For details on sound program, refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect” (p.33).
• Selectable items vary depending on the selected sound program or decoder.
❏ 2ch Stereo
❏ 5ch Stereo
• Selectable items in “5ch Stereo” vary depending on types of speakers connected to the unit.
❏ Category: MUSIC (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo)
Sound programs
Hall in Munich, Hall in Vienna, Chamber, Cellar Club, The Roxy Theatre, The Bottom Line
Item Description Setting
Direct
Automatically bypasses the DSP
circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of
tone control etc., when an analog
audio source is played back.
Auto (Default), Off
“Auto” outputs sound by bypassing
the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit in the following situations.
• Tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0 dB (p.57).
• “Equalizer” is set to “Through”
(p.63).
• “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Off”
(p.57).
Item Description Setting
Center Level
Adjusts the center channel
volume.
0% to 100% (Default: 100%)Surround L Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround L channel.
Surround R Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround R channel.
Reset
Initializes the level of each
speaker.
OK, CANCEL
Press the cursor keys ( / ) to
select “OK,” and then press ENTER
to initialize all level settings.
Item Description Setting
DSP Level
Changes the effect level (level of
the sound field effect to be
added).
-6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the effect level is output. The lower
the value is, the smaller the effect
level is output.
En 67
❏ Category: MOVIE
Sound programs
Sports, Action Game, Roleplaying Game, Music Video, Standard, Spectacle, Sci-Fi, Adventure,
Drama, Mono Movie
• “Decode Type” is only available when selecting “Standard,” “Spectacle,” “Sci-Fi,” “Adventure” and “Drama.”
❏ SUR. DECODE
When selecting “ PLII Music” or “Neo:6 Music” in the “Decode Type,” the following
settings can be set.
■ When “ PLII Music” is selected:
■ When “Neo:6 Music” is selected:
item Description Setting
Decode Type
Select a decoder to play back
sources combined with a sound
program.
PL
II Movie, Neo:6 Cinema
DSP Level
Changes the effect level (level of
the sound field effect to be
added).
-6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the effect level is output. The lower
the value is, the smaller the effect
level is output.
item Description Setting
Decode Type
Select a decoder to play back
sources
Pro Logic, PL
II Movie,
PL
II Music, PLII Game,
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
Reset
Initializes the settings of
“SUR.DECODE.”
OK, CANCEL
Press the cursor keys ( / ) to
select “OK,” and then press ENTER
to initialize the settings.
Item Description Setting
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the
front sound field.
Off (Default), On
When set to “On,” front left/right
channels sounds are sent to the
surround speakers as well as the
front speakers for a wraparound
effect.
Center Width
Spreads the center channel sound
to the front left and right speakers
to suit your needs or preferences.
0 to 7 (Default: 3)
The higher the value is, the broader
the center channel is output. The
lower the value is, the narrower the
center channel is output.
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level
between the front sound field and
the surround sound field.
-3 to +3 (Default: 0)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the front sound field is. The lower
the value is, the stronger the
surround sound field is.
Item Description Setting
Center Image
Adjusts the front left and right
channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center
channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
0.0 to 1.0 (Default: 0.3)
The higher the value is, the stronger
the center channel is and the
narrower the center width is. The
lower the value is, the weaker the
center channel is and the broader
the center width is.
En 68
Configuring the various settings (Function)
Set the various features that have handy functions.
■ Input Rename
Changes the input name displayed on the front display and TV screen.
Input
All inputs except for TUNER
■ Procedure
1 Select “Input Rename,” and press ENTER.
2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a name which you want to rename, and then
press ENTER.
3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a preset name to your liking, and then press
ENTER.
4 (To confirm the selected name) Press ENTER.
(To rename the selected name) Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a character
that you want to change, and then press the cursor keys ( / ) to change the
character.
5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “OK,” and then press ENTER.
6 To change other input names, repeat step 2 to 5.
7 Press SETUP to close “Input Rename.”
• Select “CANCEL” in step 5 to return to the previous screen without confirming the name changed.
■ Auto Power Down
If you do not operate the unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it
will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function).
Settings
Default setting
8Hours (U.K. and Europe models)
Off (Other models)
■ Dimmer
Sets the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (The higher the value the brighter the display.)
Default setting
0
■ Short Message
Turns the short message displayed on the TV screen on or off. For example, this
settings is set to “Off” to prevent that the subscription of video images is got behind the
short message.
Settings
Input currently edited
Input name currently renamed
Off Auto Power Down function is disabled.
4Hours, 8Hours,
12Hours
Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated the unit for the
selected amount time. A countdown of 30 seconds is displayed on the
front display before entering the standby mode.
Off Does not display the short message on the TV screen.
On (Default)
Displays the short message on the TV screen. When the output video
signals are being upscalled, the short message may not be displayed.
En 69
■ Memory Guard
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the
“Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE.
Settings
• If you try to set the protected items, “Memory Guard! (Memory Guard!)” is displayed on the front display and
TV monitor.
Setting HDMI functions (HDMI)
Set the settings on HDMI functions.
■ HDMI Control
Enable or disable the HDMI control (p.87).
Settings
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “TV Audio Input,” “ARC,” “Standby Sync” and
“SCENE” can be set.
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” (p.70) or “Standby Through” (p.71) is automatically fixed
to “Control Sync” and cannot be set manually.
Off (Default) Settings are not protected.
On
Prohibits changes to the settings in the “Setup” menu until it is returned
to “Off.” During memory guard, the protection icon ( ) is displayed at
upper right on the TV monitor.
Off (Default) Disables the HDMI control function.
On Enables the HDMI control function.
En 70
❏ TV Audio Input
Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while the HDMI Control
function is on. When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source
selected here.
Settings
Default setting
AV4
• While “ARC” is set to “On,” the input source selected here is used for TV audio input. Therefore, the jack
selected for the input source on the rear of the unit cannot be used.
❏ ARC
Enable or disable ARC (Audio Return Channel) (p.16).
Settings
❏ Standby Sync
Specify whether or not to turn off the unit automatically when the TV connected to the
unit with HDMI cable turns off.
Settings
• “Standby Sync” is available only if your TV is compatible with the HDMI control function.
❏ SCENE
Specify whether or not a TV or external device (such as a BD/DVD player) connected to
the unit is operated by interlocking by pressing SCENE.
Choices
BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO
Settings
Default setting
On (BD/DVD, TV)
Off (CD, RADIO)
• When this item is set to “On” and the external devices that are compatible with the HDMI control function
(with some exceptions) are connected to the unit, the SCENE synchronization is activated (p.32).
■ Audio Output
Choose whether audio is played back through the unit or through a TV.
❏ Amp
Specify whether or not audio signals are output through the unit.
Settings
❏ HDMI OUT (TV)
Specify whether or not audio signals are output through a TV connected via the HDMI
OUT jack.
Settings
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot be
set manually.
AV1-6
The selected input source between AV1 to 6 receives audio signals
from TV.
AUDIO AUDIO receives audio signals from TV.
Off Disables ARC (Audio Return Channel function).
On (Default) Enables ARC (Audio Return Channel function).
Off Does not turn off the unit when the TV is turned off.
On Always turns off the unit when the TV is turned off.
Auto (Default)
In a case of the followings, the unit turns off by interlocking power-off of
the TV:
• Watching the TV (input source is set to AV4.)
• Using HDMI devices (input source is set to HDMI, and the device
connected to HDMI jack is being played.)
Off Does not synchronize the external device with SCENE.
On
Synchronizes the external device when pressing the appropriate
SCENE.
Off Audio is not output from speakers.
On (Default) Audio is output from speakers.
Off (Default) Audio is not output from the TV.
On Audio is output from the TV.
En 71
■ Standby Through
Specify whether or not audio/video signals from HDMI inputs are to continue to be
transmitted to a TV when the unit is in standby mode.
Settings
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Standby Through” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot
be set manually.
• While “Standby Through” is activated, the standby indictor on the front panel lights up.
• While “Standby Through” is activated, the input source can be switched between HDMI1-4 with the remote
control. The standby indicator on the front panel flashes twice in response.
Setting the language displayed on the TV screen
(Language)
Selecting the language displayed on the TV screen.
Settings
• Only English is displayed on the front display.
• Even if selecting a language in this item, the characters contained in the name of file, folder and song
cannot be displayed in the selected language.
Off (Default) Does not output HDMI signals to a TV.
On Outputs HDMI signals to a TV (1 to 3 W power consumption)
English (Default) English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Français
Deutsch
Español
En 72
Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu
Looking at the front display to configure the system settings of the unit.
1 Switch the unit to the standby mode if the unit is turned on.
2 Press while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel.
3 Press PROGRAM to select the item.
4 Press STRAIGHT to select the value.
5 Press to switch the unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on
again.
The settings become effective and the unit is turned on.
Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu
Changing the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected.
Settings
Changing the remote control ID
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an
identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set
each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (Default), ID2
■ To change the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically
stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
1 Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3 Enter “5019” (to switch to ID1) or “5020” (to switch to ID2) with the numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice.
If SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks 6 times, the registration failed. Repeat from step1.
• If the remote control ID is changed, the registered settings of the remote control code (p.75) are kept.
Configuring the system settings of the unit (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Items Descriptions
SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Sets the impedance of speakers.
REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
TV FORMAT Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.
INIT Initializes various settings for the unit.
key
STRAIGHT keyPROGRAM key
6ΩMIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are connected.
8ΩMIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are connected.
SP IMP. -8 MIN
REMOTEID-ID1
En 73
Changing TV format
Change the color encoding format of TV monitor to PAL or NTSC, to match the format
used by the TV connected to the unit.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
• The default setting differs depending on your country or region.
Initializing various settings for the unit
Initialize various settings stored in the unit depending on the selected item from the
following.
Settings
DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.
ALL Resets the unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.
TVFORMAT-NTSC
INIT-CANCEL
En 74
You can operate an external device such as a TV or BD/DVD player
with the remote control of the unit by setting the remote control code
for the external device (remote control code).
• External devices that do not support infrared remote control cannot be used.
• Confirm that the remote control ID is set to “ID1” on the external device. If another
remote control ID is set on the external device, the remote control does not work
correctly even if the remote control codes for the external device are registered on
the remote control.
• Leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control for more than 2 minutes, may
clear the registered remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the
batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes.
• When the external device cannot be operated with the remote control even if all
corresponding remote control codes are set to the remote control, the external
device is not supported.
• The manufacturers and external devices that do not exit in “Remote Control Code
Search” contained in the CD-ROM are not available for operations of the unit’s
remote control.
• Remote control code of an external device cannot be set from the name or model
number of a unit.
Registering remote control codes for TV
operations
Register a TV remote control code to control the TV with the remote
control.
• When the audio output jack on the TV is connected to the input jack on the unit,
follow the procedure in “Registering remote control codes for external device
operations” (p.75) to register a TV remote control code.
1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to search the available remote control codes from
the category or manufacturer of the TV.
2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2.
3 Press TV .
4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the
numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times.
Controlling other devices with the remote control
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
TV
TV
V
O
L
T
V
CH
INPUT
MU
T
E
10
ENT
MO
DE
SC
EN
E
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
DIRE
CT
HDMI
A
V
A
A
FM
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
U
SB
AU
DI
O
O
PTI
ON
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
CD
RADI
O
TUNER
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
3
4
V
-
V
V
A
UX
[
A
]
D
OC
K
CODE SET
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
TV
Numeric keys
When the HDMI control functions of both unit and the playback
device are enabled, the devices may be controlled using the
remote control even if not registering the remote control code.
En 75
■ Operating the TV with the remote control
When the remote control codes for the TV are registered, the TV can
be operated at any time using the TV control keys, regardless of the
selected input source.
• When a TV remote control code is registered to an input selection key, the TV can
be operated using the TV operation keys only when the input source with the TV
code registered is selected.
Registering remote control codes for
external device operations
Register remote control codes for external devices (such as a BD/
DVD player) to control them with the unit’s remote control. Because
the remote control codes are registered to each input selection key,
when you select an input source the remote control instantly
switches to control that input source.
• The CD player (Yamaha: 5095) to AV3 as factory default settings. No remote
control keys are assigned to other input selection keys.
1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to search the available remote control codes for the
category, manufacturer, or external device.
2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2.
3 Press an input selection key.
(Example) When the remote control codes for the BD/DVD
player connected to HDMI1 jack are assigned, press HDMI1.
• Use [A] for external device operations only. Set this keys to remote control
codes if you want to perform external device operations without linking to
input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to
assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs.
4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the
numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.
If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times. If
the registration fails, repeat from step 2.
• For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote
control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Changing the settings
for the SCENE function” (p.32).
TV operation
keys
INPUT Switches video inputs to the TV.
MUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.
TV VOL Controls the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switches TV channels.
TV Turns the TV on and off.
SCENE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
INF
O
HDMI
P
O
P-
U
P
MENU
DI
S
PL
A
Y
A
A
OPTION
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
10
ENT
MO
DE
CODE SET
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
HDMI 1-4
V-AUX
AV 1-6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
[A]
SCENE
TV CH
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV VOL
Input selection keys
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
En 76
■ Operating external devices
When the remote control codes for external devices are assigned to
an input selection key, the external device can be controlled with
the following keys after selecting the appropriate input source or
SCENE.
• Use SOURCE/RECEIVER to switch the device to be controlled with menu
operation keys and numeric keys between the unit and external devices. The unit
can be controlled when SOURCE/RECEIVER glows orange. External devices can
be controlled when the key glows green.
• The keys above are only available when there are the corresponding keys on the
remote control of external devices.
Initializing all remote control codes
Initializing all remote control codes to the initial factory settings.
1 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings
will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes
after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1.
2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3 Enter “9981” using the numeric keys.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully SOURCE/
RECEIVER will blink twice. If the reset fails, SOURCE/
RECEIVER blinks six times. If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
SOURCE
Turns on and off external
devices.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor Selects an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
DISPLAY Switch the content of display.
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP MENU Displays a pop-up menu.
Stops playback.
Stops playback temporarily.
Starts playback of the currently
selected song (or video).
Searches backwards/forwards
while pressing them.
Skips to the beginning of the
currently playing song (or
video)/the next song (or video).
Numeric keys Enter numbers.
TV operation keys Operate a TV.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SLEEP DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
D
VD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
USB
AUDIO
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
123
4
MODE
TV
CD
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
5
6
4
1 2 3 4
V-AUX
[ A ]
DOCK
V
OLUME
E
NHAN
C
ER
S
LEEP DIRE
CT
M
O
VIE
MU
S
I
C
MUTE
FM
MEM
O
R
Y
AM
PRE
S
ET
INF
O
HDMI
OPTION
S
ETUP
TU
NIN
G
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
U
R
.
DE
CO
DE
10
ENT
MO
DE
SOURCE
CODE SET
SOURCE/
RECEIVER
HDMI 1-4
V-AUX
AV 1-6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
USB
[A]
SCENE
TV CH
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV VOL
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
TV operation keys
External device
operation keys
Menu operation keys
En 77
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance...
If you have changed speakers or speaker system, perform YPAO to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.26). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.62).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control...
If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote
control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this
unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.65).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when turning on this unit...
By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be
applied when this receiver is turned on (p.65).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.69).
The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and another Yamaha
product that is not intended...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on
another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case,
set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver
(p.72).
Frequently asked questions
En 78
Refer to the table below if the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
Confirm the following points first.
a The power plugs of the unit, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are plugged into the electric outlet securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are turned on.
c The cables between devices are connected securely.
Power/system
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power will not turn on.
The internal circuits of the unit have a problem.
The capability to turn on the power is disabled as a safety precaution. Contact
your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repairs.
The unit cannot be turned off.
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in
the power supply voltage.
Press and hold (power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and
rebooted.
The unit enters standby mode soon after
the power is turned on.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable is shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly.
The unit enters standby mode.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the unit, and play the source again.
The auto power down function is activated because of no operations
with the remote control or the unit itself for a while.
Set “Auto Power Down” to “Off” to disable the auto power down function
(p.68).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly.
The heat protection has been activated because sound was continually
output at high volumes.
Wait until the unit cools to normal temperature, turn on the unit again and turn
down the volume level and play the source again (p.31).
The unit does not work properly.
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in
the power supply voltage.
Press and hold (power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and
rebooted.
En 79
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection key.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source
device, such as a CD-ROM.
Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on the unit.
The mute function is activated. Press MUTE to unmute.
The volume cannot be increased.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If after checking you can find no problems, replace the
cables.
The max volume of the unit is restricted by “Max Volume” function. Adjust the max volume of the unit in “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu.
The device connected to the output jack of the unit is not turned on.
(This may occur because of the character of AV receiver.)
Turn on all devices connected to the unit.
No sound is output from one speaker.
Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the
input source.
You can confirm the number of source channels in the input signal with
“Channel (Chan)” of “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58).
Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the
sound program or decoder.
You can confirm the number of output channels with the speaker indicators on
the front display (p.8).
Output from the affected speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.26), or set the size or enable the affected speaker in
“Configuration” (p.62) on the “Setup” menu.
The volume of the affected speaker is set excessively low.
Perform YPAO (p.26), or adjust the volume level of the affected speaker in
“Level” (p.63) on the “Setup” menu.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables.
The affected speaker may be malfunctioning.
Replace the affected speaker with another speaker that is operating correctly
to confirm whether the speaker is malfunctioning. If no sound comes from the
replacement speaker, the unit may be malfunctioning.
“Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value.
The speakers that have a problem cannot be confirmed. Use “Test Tone” to confirm the speakers that do not output sounds (p.64).
No sound is heard from the subwoofer.
The source does not contain LFE or low frequency signals.
To confirm, set “Extra Bass” to “On” to output the low frequency sound of the
front channel from the subwoofer (p.63).
The subwoofer is inactive. Perform YPAO (p.26), or set “Subwoofer” to “Use” in the “Setup” menu (p.62).
The subwoofer is tuned off. Turn on the subwoofer.
The volume of the subwoofer is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value.
No sound from a device connected
using an HDMI cable.
The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital
copyright protection (HDCP).
You can confirm if message concerning HDMI error is displayed in “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58).
HDMI input audio is set to not output from the speakers. Set “Amp” to “On” in “Audio Output” of the “Setup” menu (p.70).
The number of devices is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En 80
Video
TV sound is not output from the unit.
(When using HDMI Control function) The setting of “TV Audio Input” to
match operations carried out on TV is not set.
Select the appropriate audio input jack in “TV Audio Input” on the “Setup”
menu.
(When using the Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return
Channel function is not working.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.70). Or, the Audio Return Channel
function is activated on the TV.
The TV is not ARC-compatible and connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Connect an optical cable to AV4 (p.18, 19), or other cables and set the
appropriate input source with “TV Audio Input” (p.70).
Sound is output from the TV.
Set “HDMI Control” (p.69) or “Audio Output” (p.70) correctly to output sound
from the unit.
Only the front speakers output sound
during multi-channel playback.
The playback device is set to output only 2 channel sound (such as
PCM).
Set the audio output settings on the playback device.
Noise/hum noise is heard.
The unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment
(including iPhone).
Move the unit further away from such equipment.
The cable between the unit and the external device may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are
connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables.
Noise is heard when a DTS-CD is being
played back.
(When only noise is output) The playback device is connected by
analog connection.
Connect the playback device to the unit by a digital connection (optical or
coaxial connection). If you still have a problem, the playback device may have
a problem.
The sound is distorted.
The devices connected to the output jacks of the unit are not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit.
The songs from the USB storage device
are played back intermittently.
The transfer rate of the USB storage device is too slow. Try another USB storage device.
Problem Cause Remedy
No picture.
An appropriate input source is not selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source (video device) using the input selection
keys.
An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate input on the TV.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by a monitor
connected to the unit.
(In case of HDMI signal) Set the playback device to output video signal that
has a resolution supported by the unit. If the playback device cannot be set,
use other video jacks to connect the device.
The cable between the unit, the TV and the video devices may be
malfunctioning.
Make sure that all cables are connected properly. If no problem, replace the
cables.
No picture from the video device
connected with an HDMI cable.
A video signal (resolution) that the unit does not support is being input.
You can confirm the video signal (resolution) currently being input in “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58). For detail on video signals which the unit
supports, refer to “Information on HDMI” (p.87).
The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital
copyright protection (HDCP).
Display “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu to confirm the video signal
(resolution) currently input (p.58).
The number of devices is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 81
Tuner (FM/AM)
Remote control
The menu of the unit is not displayed.
The TV is connected to the unit with a cable except for HDMI cable. Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to the unit.
An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV.
Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT of the
unit.
Problem Cause Remedy
FM stereo radio reception is noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna
is weak.
Switch the receiving mode to monaural using MODE (p.38).
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is noisy.
The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing
an outdoor AM antenna.
The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected
automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.38).
Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a
sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be preset.
Automatic station preset is used to preset AM stations.
Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station
preset.
Problem Cause Remedy
The remote control does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance. Operate the remote control within its operating range (p.4).
The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries (p.4).
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp,
strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The operation device is set to an external device.
Switch the operation device to the unit using RECEIVER/SOURCE (it should
glow orange) and operate the unit (p.10).
The remote control ID of the remote control and the unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of the unit and the remote control (p.72).
External devices cannot be controlled
using the remote control.
The operation device is set to the unit.
Switch the operation device to the external device using RECEIVER/SOURCE
(it should glow green) and operate the external device (p.10).
The remote control code is not correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly (p.74, 75). Even if the remote control
code is correctly set, there are some devices that do not respond to the
remote control.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 82
Message list
Message (alphabetical order) Cause Remedy
Access error
The unit cannot access your USB storage device or iPod. Try another USB device or iPod.
There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device
to the unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the
unit.
When an iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on.
CHECK SP WIRES!
The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was
turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are
connected properly.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to the unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the iPod dock (p.44).
Reconnect the iPod to the iPod dock (p.44).
Loading...
The data of the USB storage devices and iPod are being loaded.
It takes a long while to load the data when connecting a device that has a
large amount of data.
No content
There is no playable data on the USB storage devices or iPod.
Connect the USB storage device or iPod in which the playable data are
stored.
No device
There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device
to the unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the
unit.
When iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on.
USB storage device is not connected to the USB port. Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the front panel of the unit.
Not found
The Bluetooth device is not found.
During pairing:
- Pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth device and the unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth device is in pairing mode.
While connected:
- Check if the Bluetooth device is turned on.
- Check if the Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) of the Yamaha Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver.
- Do pairing again.
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by the unit. Connect an iPod that is supported by the unit (p.43).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on your iPod. Check the songs stored on your iPod.
The song that the unit cannot play back is selected, or the selected
song data is damaged.
Select and play another song.
View ON SCREEN
The selected item cannot be displayed on the front display.
Confirm the display on the TV connected with an HDMI cable.
When “SETUP” is displayed at the upper left on the front display, press SETUP
on the remote control to return to normal display on the front display.
When “USB” or “DOCK” at the upper left on the front display, press the cursor
key ( ) to return to the display of menu list or playing song.
En 83
The following illustration indicates the ideal speaker layout. We recommend using the following layout as a guide when placing the speakers.
However, by using YPAO, you can automatically optimize the speaker settings to suit your speaker layout.
Ideal speaker layout
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
En 84
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem,
and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3
incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their
effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home
conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is
inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby
Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.
CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so
that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by
regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss
of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-
channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby
Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as
0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound
effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with
unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic
II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby
Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and
right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround
channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for
music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic
sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a
surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based
media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible
with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital,
allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and
is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared
to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality
transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-
channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and
natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low
bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with
secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition
disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-
definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Glossary
En 85
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-
based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by
HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super
Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio
quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The
frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit
or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to
120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared
to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder.
It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for
movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and
transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD
audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small
unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then
modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is
called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling
frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters
for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the
sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround
effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible
to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for
luminance and the P
B and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with
this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the
“color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor
with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a
video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video
component transmits these three elements combined.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in
previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth
tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent
many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the
number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital
audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV
receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard,
enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a
secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.
En 86
Video signal flow
The video signals input from video devices to the unit are output to a TV.
• Analog video signal input to the unit is only output from the same type of analog video jack.
• HDMI video signal is output from the HDMI OUT jack at the same resolution as that is input.
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI1-4 HDMI OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
(AV1-2)
VIDEO
(AV3-6)
VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT)
Input Output
En 87
HDMI Control
Connecting the unit and TV with an HDMI cable links the TV’s remote control to the unit
so you can use it to turn on the power and adjust the volume of the unit (HDMI Control).
Playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable (such as a BD/DVD player
compatible with HDMI control) can also be operated with the remote control. For details
on operations between the TV and the playback devices using the HDMI control
function, refer to the manual for each device.
For details on connections of HDMI cables, refer to “Connecting a TV” (p.16) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.21).
Operating the unit using the HDMI control function
- Turning the power on and off
- Volume control, including mute
- Changing the input to video/audio from the operated external device
• The following operations of the unit are interlocked with the TV/playback devices by HDMI control.
- Switching a SCENE (p.32)
- Displaying the “Setup” menu (p.60)
- Operating external device with the unit’s remote control (p.75)
The following settings are required after connecting the TV and playback devices to the
unit to use the HDMI Control function.
• The following settings are required whenever a new HDMI compatible device is added.
1 Turn on the unit, the TV and external devices.
2 Set the HDMI Control function of the unit, the TV and external devices
compatible with HDMI Control (such as a BD/DVD player) to “On.”
Set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” to enable the HDMI Control
function of the unit.
3 Turn the TV off.
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not
synchronized, unplug the power cable of the TV.
4 Turn the TV on.
Confirm that the unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it
on manually.
5 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to
the unit.
6 Turn the playback devices on, and confirm the following points.
The unit: Confirm that the input source for HDMI input (one of HDMI1-4) has been
selected. If a different input source has been selected, change it
manually.
TV: Confirm that the video signal from the player is being properly received
by the TV.
7 Confirm that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
on/off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If the HDMI Control function does not work properly, unplugging and re-plugging the power cable of the unit
and the TV may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of video output settings on the
TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices made by the same manufacturer so that the HDMI Control
function works more effectively.
Information on HDMI
HDMI
Control
HDMI
Control
Playback device
(such as a BD/DVD player)
The unit
TV
TV’s remote control
En 88
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the device). Refer to
the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of
the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ©DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
iPod™/iPhone™
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless
performance.
iPhone and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with
a license agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD
DVD, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition
audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
Trademarks
En 89
Input Jacks
• Analog Audio...................... 4 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical ...................................................................2 (AV1, AV4)
Coaxial ..................................................................2 (AV2, AV3)
• Video
Composite ............................................. 5 (AV3-6, VIDEO AUX)
Component............................................................2 (AV1, AV2)
• Other
DOCK [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models]
..................................................... 1 (Audio, Composite Video)
USB .........................................................................................1
Device Type................................... USB Mass Storage Class
Audio Format............MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM), MPEG-4 AAC
Max Audio Support fs........................................48 kHz/24 bit
Cover Art Format ................................................. PNG, JPEG
PORTABLE ....................................................... 1 (VIDEO AUX)
Output Jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker Out ........................................................................5ch
Front L/R (FRONT L/R)
Center (CENTER)
Surround L/R (SURROUND L/R)
Subwoofer Out ..............................................1 (SUBWOOFER)
Rec Out ...................................................................1 (AV OUT)
Headphone Out.....................................................1 (PHONES)
• Video
Monitor Out
Composite ............................................................................1
Component...........................................................................1
Rec Out
Composite ............................................................1 (AV OUT)
HDMI
• Input ......................................................................4 (HDMI1-4)
• Output.................................................................1 (HDMI OUT)
• HDMI Specification
Deep Color
“x.v.Color”
Auto Lip Sync
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
3D Video
• Video Format
Repeater Mode
VGA
480i@60 Hz
576i@50 Hz
480p@60 Hz
576p@50 Hz
1080i@50/60 Hz
720p@50/60 Hz
1080p@24/50/60 Hz
• Audio Format
Dolby Digital
DTS
DSD (6ch)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
PCM (2ch to 8ch, Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection ........................................HDCP compatible
• Link Function .................................................. CEC compatible
Tuner
• Analog Tuner
FM/AM ..................................................................... 1 (TUNER)
Compatible Decoding Format
• Decoding Format
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS Express
DTS
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
DTS 96/24
• Post Decoding Format
Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic
II Music
Dolby Pro Logic
II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic
II Game
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Specifications
En 90
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (1 channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .....................................................................105 W/ch
Center.........................................................................105 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................105 W/ch
• Rated Output Power (2 channels driven simultaneously)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ................................................................. 85 W+85 W
Center................................................................................85 W
Surround L/R .......................................................... 85 W+85 W
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch
Center.........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)...................................110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω).............................................110/130/150 W
• Dynamic Headroom
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω.................................................................................. 0.2 dB
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω)............................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) .............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................. 100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ...........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV5 etc. (DIRECT, Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
......................................................................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................. 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC
[Other models] ................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Cb/Cr ............................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)...1.5 Vp-p
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono................................................................................ 72 dB
Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo ............................................................................... 0.5%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]....................AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................270 W/320 VA
[Other models]................................................................ 280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off ..............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On / Standby Through On..............1.2 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]............................................. 470 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)............................435 x 151 x 363 mm
(17-1/8" x 6" x 14-5/16")
• Weight............................................................. 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
YD338B0/OMEN2
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Please read “Safety Brochure” before use. English for North America, Europe and Oceania CONTENTS Check the supplied items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting recording devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 FEATURES What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Full of useful functions!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 At time like this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front display (indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 SETUP General setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 5.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 4.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 3.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 2.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 5.1-channel speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Cable plugs and jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Audio/video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Analog video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Audio jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Connecting playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Connecting to the jack on the front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Preparation before using YPAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Starting the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Confirming the measurement result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Switching the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Switching the information displayed on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) . . . . . . . . 32 Changing the settings for the SCENE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Enjoying the desired sound field effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround decoder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Playback without sound field effects (straight decoding mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Playing back fidelity sound of the selected source (direct mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Playing back the compressed audio dynamically (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Enjoying surround audio with headphones (SILENT CINEMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Listening to FM/AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Selecting a frequency for reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Registering favorite stations (Preset tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Radio Data System tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Combining audio from the radio with video from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Playing back songs with iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Controlling by iPod itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 En 2 PLAYBACK (continued) APPENDIX Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Frequently asked questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Pairing Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Playing back songs by connecting to the Bluetooth device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Playing back songs with USB storage devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Controlling while watching a TV monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Combining a song from a USB storage device (iPod) with video from an external device. . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Available settings in Option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Setup menu list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Configuring the settings of audio output signals (Sound). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Configuring the various settings (Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Setting HDMI functions (HDMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Setting the language displayed on the TV screen (Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Power/system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Tuner (FM/AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Ideal speaker layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 HDMI signal compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Configuring the system settings of the unit (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Changing the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Changing the remote control ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Changing TV format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Initializing various settings for the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Controlling other devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Registering remote control codes for TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Registering remote control codes for external device operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Initializing all remote control codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 En 3 Check the supplied items Preparing the remote control • Insert the two supplied AAA batteries into the battery case, following the polarity markings (+ and -). Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product. ■ Remote Control ■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2) ■ YPAO microphone ■ VIDEO AUX input cover Operating range of the remote control • Be sure to aim the remote control within the following range at the remote control sensor on the unit during operation. ■ AM antenna ■ FM antenna Within 6 m (20 ft.) * The supplied FM antenna will differ depending on the country or region. ■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) ■ Easy Setup Guide • This manual is created prior to production of the product. Some parts of the product and the specifications may differ as a result of improvements, etc. • This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control. ■ Safety Brochure • “ ” indicates the explanations for better use. • “ ” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit. • This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod.” “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions. En 4 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Enjoying music stored on iPod or Bluetooth devices p.43, 50 Operating the iPod or USB menu (on TV) p.46, 52 Supports 2 to 5.1 channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. * Requires optional Yamaha products such as iPod dock, iPod wireless system, and Bluetooth receiver. USB device PC Audio Bluetooth receiver (optional) Speakers Automatically optimizing the speaker settings to suit your room (YPAO) Sound field reproductions like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) p.26 Multi-channel playback from stereo sounds (surround decoder) p.36 Enjoying enhanced compression artifacts (Compressed Music Enhancer) p.37 p.34 Audio HDMI Control iPod dock/iPod wireless system (optional) Audio HDMI Control Video Audio/Video AV receiver (the unit) TV BD/DVD player Operating external devices with the supplied remote control p.74 Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) Remote control of this unit Easily connecting devices such as game console to the audio/ video jacks on the front panel Operating the TV, AV receiver and BD/DVD player in combination (HDMI Control) p.32 p.24 TV remote control p.87 En 5 ● Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.36) Full of useful functions! ● Connecting various devices (p.16, 21) Various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect external devices such as BD/DVD player and CD player. The unit is also equipped with input jacks on the front panel which allow you easily connect and enjoy game consoles, camcorders and USB devices, and so on. The unit supports the surround playback of up to 5.1 channel. Various sound programs and surround decoders equipped with the unit can supply more intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in your room. And, the unit creates virtual presence speakers to produce 3D surround sound (CINEMA DSP 3D). The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack of your external device (p.22). I want to fine adjust sound quality... Use “Equalizer” in the “Setup” menu to adjust sound quality of tone with an equalizer (p.63). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.64). USB device BD/DVD player At time like this I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to redirect the output audio signal to the TV (p.70). CD player I want to prevent forgetting to turn the unit off... Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to prevent forgetting to turn the unit off (p.68). ● Listening to radio with built-in receiver (p.38) Portable audio player TV Camcorder ● Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.16, 70) When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need an HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit. Making such a simple connection enables to output video to the TV, input audio from the TV, and transmit HDMI Control signals at once. HDMI Control TV audio You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as preset stations automatically or manually. ● Enjoying faithful sound compared to the original source (p.37) When the Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you to enjoy the faithful sound quality compared to the original source. ● Easy operation with a TV monitor When connecting your TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, the menu of the unit can be displayed on the TV monitor to operate the unit. You can set the settings of the unit viewing the TV monitor. I want to play back BD/DVD player without the unit turned on... Use “Standby Through” in the “Setup” menu to play back BD/DVD player while the unit keeps to be turned off (p.71). There are many other functions to customize or confirm the settings of this unit. For details, see the following pages. • SCENE settings (p.32) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.65) • Various function settings (p.68) • Current signal information (audio signal, video signal) (p.58) • Basic settings before use (p.72) • YPAO (p.26) • Operation menus of iPod and USB device (p.46, 52) Video from external device • The “Option” menu (p.56) • The “Setup” menu (p.60) En 6 Part names and functions Front panel NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V471 DIRECT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES SILENT CINEMA 1 (power) key Turns the unit on or into the standby mode. 2 Standby indicator When the unit is in standby mode, lights up in any of the following cases when: - The “Standby Through” function is working (p.71). - The iPod is charging with “Standby Charge” (p.58). - The Yamaha iPod wireless system is connected (p.45). 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.26). 4 Remote control receiver Receives signals from remote control (p.4). 5 INFO Changes the information displayed on the front display (p.31). 6 MEMORY Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (p.39). 7 PRESET Selects the FM/AM preset stations (p.39). USB INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT iPod/iPhone PORTABLE VIDEO L AUDIO 9 Front display Displays information about the unit (p.8). 0 TUNING Changes FM/AM tuner frequency (p.38). a DIRECT Enables/disables the direct mode (p.37). b PHONES jack For connecting headphones. c USB port For connecting USB devices (p.52). R g PROGRAM Selects a sound program and surround decoder (p.33). h STRAIGHT Enables/disables the straight decoding mode (p.37). i VIDEO AUX jack For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.24). Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover (p.4) when not using this jack to protect against dust. j VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. d INPUT Switches the selected input source. e TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers and headphones (p.57). f SCENE Selects the input source and the sound programs with a single button. When the unit is in standby mode, press this key to turn on the unit (p.32). 8 FM/AM Switches FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (p.38). En 7 Front display (indicator) OUT ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC STEREO 3 TUNED SLEEP VOL. MUTE L SL 1 HDMI Lights up when an HDMI device is connected to the unit or an HDMI signal is being output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are output. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when a sound program with CINEMA DSP is activated. 3 CINEMA DSP 3D Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.36) is activated. 4 ENHANCER Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37) is activated. SW C R SR 0 Cursor indicators Lights up the available cursors on the remote control for each operation. a Multi information display Displays a range of information. Press INFO on the remote control or front panel repeatedly to cycle through displayed information (p.31). b Speaker indicators Displays speaker terminals from which signals are output. Front speaker L Front speaker R Center speaker Surround speaker L Surround speaker R Subwoofer 5 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.57) is activated. 6 STEREO Lights up when stereo broadcasting is input. TUNED Lights up when an FM/AM station is received. 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on (p.31). 8 MUTE Flashes when audio is muted. 9 VOLUME Displays the current volume level. En 8 Rear panel MAINS ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L FM PR 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L SPEAKERS R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO (U.K. and Europe models) 1 DOCK jack For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock, Wireless System for iPod and Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (p.44, 45, 50). 2 HDMI OUT jack For connecting a TV that is compatible with HDMI input to output audio/video signals. TV audio is input when ARC is used (p.16, 18, 19). 3 ANTENNA jacks For connecting AM and FM antennas (p.24). 4 HDMI 1-4 jacks For connecting external devices that are compatible with HDMI outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.21). 5 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting speakers (p.14). 6 Power cable 7 MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting a TV that is compatible with component video signals and outputting video signals (p.20). VIDEO jack a SUBWOOFER jack For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (p.14). The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in white. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or other external device. For connecting a TV that is compatible with video signals to output video signals (p.20). ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO 8 AV1-6 jacks For connecting to playback devices equipped with audio/ video outputs to receive audio/video signals (p.21). 9 AV OUT jacks For outputting received audio/video signals when analog inputs (AV5-6 or AUDIO) are selected (p.25). AM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L FM PR 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L SPEAKERS R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 A AV 2 A COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 A OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 A AV 5 A AV 6 A AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO Output jacks 0 AUDIO jacks For connecting to playback devices equipped with analog audio outputs to input audio signals (p.23). For connecting the unit to an AC wall outlet (p.25). En 9 1 Remote control signal transmitter Remote control Transmits infrared signals. 2 SOURCE (source power) Switches an external device on and off. CODE SET HDMI 1 2 3 [A] 3 Input selection keys Select an input source on the unit to play back. SOURCE RECEIVER 4 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK HDMI 1-4 V-AUX AV 1-6 AUDIO DOCK USB TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING TUNER USB [A] SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT HDMI 1-4 jacks VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel AV 1-6 jacks Audio jack A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod wireless receiver, and Bluetooth wireless receiver that are connected to the DOCK jack. FM/AM tuner USB devices connected the USB jack. Switches an external device that can be operated with the External device operation keys without changing inputs (p.75). TV CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 4 Radio keys Operate the FM/AM tuner. OPTION SETUP FM AM MEMORY PRESET TUNING Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM. Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. 5 INFO Switches the information displayed on the front display (p.31). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH ENT 0 External device operation keys Operate recording, playback, menu displays, etc. for external devices (p.75, 76). a MODE Switches the FM broadcast receiving modes (p.38) or the iPod operation modes (p.49). b Numeric keys Enter numbers such as the frequency of FM/AM tuner and remote control codes. c TV control keys Controls TV operation, such as input and volume level (p.74, 75). d CODE SET e SOURCE/RECEIVER Switches the device (external device or the unit) that is available with remote control keys. Lights up in orange when the unit is selected, in green when an external device is selected. f RECEIVER (receiver power) Switches the unit between on and standby mode. MUTE MODE Select menu items and settings. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen when the menu is displayed. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Sets remote control codes for external devices (p.74). SCENE BD DVD 9 Menu operation keys 6 SLEEP Selects the time of sleep timer (120 min., 90 min., 60 min., 30 min., and Off) by pressing this key repeatedly. SLEEP indicator lights up on the front display while using the sleep timer. After the selected time passes, the unit switches into the standby mode. 7 SCENE Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button. When the unit is in standby mode, pressing this key turns on the unit (p.32). 8 SETUP Displays/finishes the “Setup” menu for the unit (p.60). g Sound selection keys Switches between the sound field effect (sound program) you are using and the surround decoder (p.33). h OPTION Displays/finishes the “Option” menu for each input source (p.56). i VOLUME Adjusts the volume balance (p.31). j MUTE Turns the mute function on and off (p.31). • Remote control codes need to be registered in advance to operate external devices with this remote control. If you use HDMI compatible devices, remote control might be available only by connecting them (p.87). En 10 SETUP General setup procedure Perform the following 8 steps before use. 1 Speaker layout (p.12) Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers, and then place the speakers in the room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.14) Connect each speaker to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.16) Connect TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.21) Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) or audio devices (CD players, etc.) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.24) Connect the FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting recording devices (p.25) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.25) After all the settings above are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.26) Adjust the volume balance and tone of speakers automatically (YPAO). All settings needed before use are completed here. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with the unit! En 11 1 Speaker layout 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Speaker layout Select the speaker layout depending on the numbers of speakers, and then place the speakers and subwoofer (with a built-in amplifier) in the room. The following section describes the representative speaker configuration of 2.1 to 5.1 channel system. NOTES • (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The unit is configured to 8Ω speakers as the factory setting. 6Ω speakers can be also connected. For details on settings for 6Ω speaker connection, refer to “Changing the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” (p.72). • (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6Ω. Type of speakers Abbr. Speaker system (the number of channels) Function Front (L) For the front channel sound (stereo sound) and effect sound Front (R) Center For the center channel sound (dialogue, vocals, etc.) Surround (L) Surround (R) For effect and vocal sound from surround channel. The surround back channel sound is output from the surround speakers when 7.1- or 6.1-channel sounds are input. Subwoofer For low-frequency effect (LFE) sound and bass sound from front and surround channels. 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● • To get recommended speaker layout, refer to “Ideal speaker layout” (p.83). En 12 1 Speaker layout 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5.1-channel speaker layout 3.1-channel speaker layout 4.1-channel speaker layout 2.1-channel speaker layout En 13 1 2 Connecting speakers 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 Connecting speakers Connect speakers to the unit. Here are connections of 5.1-channel speaker layout as examples. If you select another channel speaker layout, connect speakers while referring to the connection of 5.1-channel speaker layout. 5.1-channel speaker layout The unit (rear) R FRONT L CENTER 2 Loosen the speaker terminal. R SURROUND L NOTES • Disconnect the power plug before connecting speakers. • Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off a subwoofer. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in.) of insulation from the end of the speaker cable and twist the bare wire firmly. SPEAKERS SUBWOOFER anything or come into contact with the metal areas of the unit. This may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front + (Red) FR ON T 3 Insert the bare wire into the gap on the side of terminal. - (Black) When it is difficult to insert the wire into the gap on the side, insert it into the gap downside of terminal. 4 Tighten the terminal. display when the unit is switched on. Connecting with a banana plug (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Necessary cables (not supplied) Speaker cables Tighten the knob, and then insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. x numbers of speakers + – + – FR ON T Banana plug Monaural pin cable (for subwoofer) x1 ■ Connecting a subwoofer Speaker terminals on the rear of the unit R FRONT CENTER L Use monaural pin cable to connect a subwoofer. Before connecting a subwoofer, turn off the subwoofer. R SURROUND L ■ Connecting speaker cables SPEAKERS SUBWOOFER ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L FM PR 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L SPEAKERS Monaural pin cable Each speaker has two speaker cables. One is for connecting the - (negative) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the + (positive) terminal. The cables are different colors, so they do not get mixed up. Connect the black side to the - (negative) terminal and the other side to the + (positive) terminal. R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO En 14 Cable plugs and jacks The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for devices. Audio/video jacks Analog video jacks Audio jacks HDMI jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks OPTICAL jacks Digital videos and sounds are transmitted. Use an HDMI cable for connection. The signal is separated into three devices: Luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video pin cable with three plugs. These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use fiber-optic cables for connection. Remove the cap before using if needed. HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cables Red PR • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. Using an HDMI cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft.) long is recommended to prevent signal quality degradation. • When connecting an external device with a DVI jack, use an HDMI/ Blue COAXIAL jacks Green These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use coaxial cables. PB Y Digital coaxial cable DVI-D cable. VIDEO jack • The HDMI control function, the Audio Return Channel function and transmission of 3D content are supported. This jack transmits conventional analog video signal. Use a video pin cable. Video pin cable AUDIO jacks These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals. Use stereo pin cables. Stereo pin cable PORTABLE jack This jack transmits conventional analog audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting. Stereo mini-plug cable En 15 1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit. The video signals input to the unit are output to the TV. TV audio can also be output from the unit. The recommended way to connect a TV varies depending on types and functions of video input jacks on the TV. Select how to connect the TV to the unit while referring to the TV manual. ■ Connection method 1 (ARC-compatible TV) Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. • The following connections and steps are supplied, supposing that “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been changed from the default setting (p.69). Does you TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection method 1 (on this page) and ■ Connection method 4 (p.20)* No HDMI OUT jack ARC The unit (rear) HDMII HDMI OUT Does you TV support HDMI Control? Yes ARC ■ Connection method 2 (p.18) and ■ Connection method 4 (p.20)* No HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI input HDM ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM FM ARC PR 75Ω PB VIDEO HDMI HDMI Y MONITOR OUT MONITO L Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes No ■ Connection method 3 (p.19) and ■ Connection method 4 (p.20)* R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO TV ■ Connection method 4 (p.20) * Necessary if your playback device is connected to the video input jacks other than HDMI1-4 jacks. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while viewing the TV monitor (p.60). HDMI, component video, or composite video signal input to the unit is output from the same type of output jack (p.86). Make necessary connections, and switch the input source on TV depending on the playback device. • If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog video cable (p.20). Necessary settings What is the HDMI control function? By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, some operations for the unit are available with the TV’s remote control, such as turning on/standby and volume control. If playback devices that support the HDMI control function (BD/DVD players, etc.) are connected to the unit, these are also acceptable. For more details, refer to “HDMI Control” (p.87). To use the HDMI control function and ARC, the following settings are required in advance. 1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices. What is the Audio Return Channel (ARC)? If your TV supports the ARC, TV audio can be output to the unit by using an HDMI cable transmitting video signals from the unit to a TV. Continues to the next page En 16 1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8 2 Configure the settings for ARC. a Confirm that the ARC function for the TV is set to on. For details on how to confirm, refer to manual of the TV. b Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of the unit. c Press SETUP. RETURN URN RNN TOP DISPLAY DIS D A For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to the manual of each device. b Turn off the TV. c Turn on the TV. SETUP VOLUME ENTER a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI control function. The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they do not turn off, turn them off manually. OPTION SETUP 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. Cursor keys ENTER POP UP d Press the cursor keys ( / The unit also turns on with the TV. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually. d Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit. ) to select “HDMI.” e Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following: Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI input source (any of “HDMI 1-4”). When it is not selected, select the correct input source manually. TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV screen. f Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows: Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices. If these operations are not available, check that “HDMI Control” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.” e Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER. • If playing back audio source by using the ARC function has a problem, set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “Off,” and connect the TV and the unit with an optical cable (p.18). • If the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to reset them or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in. • If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV. All settings have been completed. When a TV program is selected with the TV remote control, input source of the unit is switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output. If it does not work correctly, confirm that the “ARC” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.” f Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “On,” and then press ENTER. g Confirm that “ARC” is set to “On.” • “AV4” is selected as the input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is used for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” on the “Setup” menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.32), register the appropriate input source on • “ARC” is set to “On” as the default setting. When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” the ARC function of SCENE (TV). the unit is enabled. h Press SETUP. En 17 1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8 ■ Connection method 2 (HDMI Control -compatible TV) Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable. c Press SETUP. OPTION SETUP SETUP VOLUME ENTER • The following connection and steps are supplied, supposing the “HDMI” in the “Setup” menu has not been changed from the default setting (p.69). RETURN URN RNN TOP DISPLAY DIS D A Cursor keys ENTER POP UP d Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI.” e Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control,” and then press ENTER. Necessary setting f Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “On,” and then press ENTER. To use the HDMI control function, the following settings are required in advance. g Press SETUP. 1 After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and AC power cable, turn on the unit, TV and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. h Turn off the TV. HDMI OUT jack ARC The unit (rear) HDMII HDMI OUT ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI input HDM ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM FM PR HDMI 75Ω PB VIDEO HDMI Y MONITOR OUT MONITO L R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 O AV 5 AV AV66 AV AV OPTICAL OUT OUT (TV) OPTICAL AUDIO1 AUDIO AV 4 O AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (Digital optical) TV • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while viewing the TV monitor (p.60). • If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog video cable (p.20). a Activate the HDMI control function of the TV and the devices that support the HDMI control function. The unit and devices are also turned off automatically with the TV’s operation. If they do not turn off, turn them off manually. i Turn on the TV. The unit also turns on. If the unit does not turn on, turn it on manually. j Change input video source on the TV to video signals from the unit. For details on setting the HDMI control function, refer to manual of each device. b Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of the unit. Continues to the next page En 18 1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8 k Turn on the playback devices, and then confirm the following: Unit: Whether the input signals from the playback devices are selected as the HDMI input source (any of “HDMI 1-4”). When it is not selected, select the correct input source manually. TV: Whether the video signals from the playback devices are displayed on the TV screen. ■ Connection method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an optical cable. HDMI OUT jack ARC The unit (rear) HDMII l Confirm whether the unit is linked with operations of the TV remote control as follows: HDMI OUT ARC Turning on/standby, volume control and selecting audio output devices. HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI input HDM ANTENNA If these operations are not available, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.” COMPONENT VIDEO AM PR HDMI 75Ω PB All settings have been completed. FM VIDEO HDMI Y MONITOR OUT MONITO L When a TV program is selected with the TV’s remote control, the input source of the unit is switched to “AV4” automatically, and TV sound is output. R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 When these operations are not linked, confirm that “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On.” OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 O AV 5 AV AV66 AV AV OPTICAL OUT OUT (TV) OPTICAL AUDIO1 AUDIO AV 4 O AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (Digital optical) TV • When the HDMI control function does not work correctly, it may be effective to turn off the devices to reset or plug in the power cable and retry with the power cable plugged in. • If the power-on operation is not linked, confirm the priority of audio output settings for the TV. • “AV4” is selected as input sound source from a TV as the default setting. When the AV4 jack is used for another device, select an input jack to be used for the TV audio in “TV Audio Input” of the “Setup” menu. Also, when using the SCENE functions (p.32), register the appropriate input source for SCENE (TV). By switching input source into “AV4” with AV4 key on the remote control or SCENE. TV sound is output from the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, each function for the unit can be configured while viewing the TV monitor (p.60). • If your playback device is connected to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO), you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jack with an analog video cable (p.20). • When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except when an OPTICAL jack (with an optical cable) is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV 1-6 or AUDIO) for the connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.32). En 19 1 2 3 Connecting a TV 4 5 6 7 8 ■ Connection method 4 The video signals input from the playback device to the analog video input jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) are output from the same type of the MONITOR OUT jack to the TV. Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack of the same type as the analog video input jacks connected to the playback device, depending on the input jack on the TV. By switching the input source to “AV4” with AV4 on the remote control or SCENE (TV), TV sound is output from the unit. COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component cable) Video input (Component video) MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR PR PR ARC PB (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 PB Y AM PB FM PR Y Y Y 75Ω MONITOR OUT PB PB PR HDM ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITO • When connecting to a TV with a cable, other than an HDMI cable, operations with TV screen (such as the L setting of the unit, operations of iPod/USB devices) are not available. R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 O AV AV66 AV 5 AV AV OPTICAL OUT OUT (TV) OPTICAL AUDIO1 AUDIO AV 4 O AV4 (OPTICAL) jack • When the AV4 jack is used for another device, or another terminal, except for an OPTICAL jack (with an TV Audio output (Digital optical) optical cable), is used for inputting TV sound, select another jack (any of AV1-6 or AUDIO) for the connection. Also, set the input sources setting of SCENE (TV) (p.32). VIDEO connection (with a video pin cable) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) Video input (Analog video) ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM V VIDEO FM MONITOR OUT PR V 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 O AV 5 AV AV66 AV AV OPTICAL OUT OUT (TV) OPTICAL AUDIO1 AUDIO AV 4 O AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (Digital optical) TV En 20 1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with various types of input jacks such as an HDMI jack. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices. For connecting an iPod, Bluetooth devices and USB storage devices, refer to the following pages. ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component cable and an audio cable (an optical cable or a coaxial cable). Input jacks of the unit (AV1-2) are different depending on the audio jacks of the video device. • Connecting an iPod (p.43) Output jack of a video device • Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (p.50) Input jack of the unit Video Audio • Connecting a USB storage device (p.52) Optical AV1 (COMPONENT + OPTICAL) Coaxial AV2 (COMPONENT + COAXIAL) Component video Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Video devices, such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and cable TV, and game consoles, are connected to the unit. Select the correct connection according to the output jacks (video/audio) of video devices connected to the unit. If a video device supports HDMI, HDMI connection is recommended. Video output (Component video) AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR PR PB ARC • When an input jack of the unit does not match the output jack of a video device, select another jack of the unit for the video device (p.22). HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 Y PR AM PB HDM PB ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO FM Y PR Y 75Ω PB ■ HDMI connection VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITO L O Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. The unit (rear) O R I HDM HDMI output OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 OPTICAL OR OPTICAL AV 5 AV 1 AV 6 AV OUT COAXIAL AV 2 AUDIO C Video device C COAXIAL AV1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV2 (COAXIAL) jack I HDM ARC MI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 ANTENNA AM HDMI 4 R FRONT HDMI L FM 75Ω MONITOR OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 L Audio output (Digital optical or coaxial) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 Video device HDMI 4 By selecting an input source with the AV1-2 key, audio and video from video devices are output from the unit. R HDMI 1-4 jacks AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO • To play back the playback device connected to the AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, it is necessary to By selecting the input source with the HDMI 1-4 key, audio and video from video devices are output from the unit. connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.20). When playing back the device, switch the input source on TV to the component video input connected to the unit. • To play back the playback device connected to the HDMI1-4 jacks, it is necessary to connect the TV to the HDMI OUT jack (p.16, 18, 19). When playing back the device, switch the input source on TV to the HDMI input connected to the unit. En 21 1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8 ■ Analog video connection ■ Change the combination of input jacks (video/audio) Connect video devices to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (any of a coaxial cable, an optical cable and stereo pin cable.) Input jacks of the unit (AV3-6) are different depending on the audio input jacks of the video devices. When an input jack of the unit does not match an output jack of a video device, select another jack of the unit to match the jack of the video device. The Following connections become available with this setting. Output jack of video device Output jacks of a video device Input jacks of the unit Input jacks of the unit Video Audio Video Coaxial AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Optical AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog video AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Audio Video Audio Optical HDMI 1-4 AV1 (OPTICAL) AV4 (OPTICAL) Coaxial HDMI 1-4 AV2-3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1-4 AV5-6 (AUDIO) AUDIO Analog stereo AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV5-6 (AUDIO) AUDIO HDMI Analog stereo AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Component video The unit (rear) (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO Necessary settings Video output (Analog video) ARC HDMI OUT DOCK As an example, the setting for connections, for which AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack is used for video signals and AV5 (AUDIO) jacks are used for audio signals, is shown below. AM VIDEO VIDEO PR PB V VIDEO V Y MONITOR OUT M L O Video output (Component video) Video device O R OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 OPTICAL OR AV OUT C AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack C COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL COAXIAL OR L L L L R R PR The unit (rear) R R PR PR PB PB PB ARC AV3-6 jacks Audio output (any of digital optical, coaxial, analog stereo) HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 Y Y Y HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM FM PR 75Ω PB VIDEO Y By selecting input source with the AV3-6 key, audio and video of video devices are output from the unit. L MONITOR OUT MONITOR O L L L R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AV OUT AUDIO R to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.20). When playing back the device, switch the input source on TV to AV5 (AUDIO) jack Video device L R AUDIO1 AV 5 • To play back the playback device connected to the AV3-6 (VIDEO) jacks, it is necessary to connect the TV AUDIO R R Audio output (Analog stereo) the composite video input connected to the unit. Continues to the next page En 22 1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 6 7 8 1 Complete the connections for external devices (such as a TV and playback device), the power cable and so on, and then turn on the unit and the TV. 2 Change the input source setting of the TV to the video from the unit. 3 Press AV2 to select “AV2” as the video input jack of the unit. 4 Press OPTION. OPTION Connect audio devices (such as a CD player, MD player and so on) to the unit. Select a correct connection depending on the output jacks of the audio devices connected to the unit. Audio output jack of audio device Audio input jack of the unit Optical AV1 (OPTICAL) AV4 (OPTICAL) Coaxial AV2-3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV5-6 (AUDIO) AUDIO VOL. Tone Control 5 Press the cursor keys ( Connecting audio devices (such as a CD player) / L SL SW C R SR ) repeatedly to select “Audio In.” OPTION The unit (rear) 92 / ARC Audio In / 6/ 6: & 5 65 HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H ANTENNA OMPONENT VIDEO O OR OPTICAL 6 Press ENTER. O FM AM OPTICAL 75Ω C VIDEO C COAXIAL R OUT AV2 Audio;;;;;;AV2 7 Press the cursor keys ( L L SL SW C OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 OR L L R R SR COAXIAL MONITOR OUT VOL. AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT source. AV2 Audio device L R R AUDIO R / ) repeatedly to select “AV5” as the input L AV1-6 jacks AUDIO jack R Audio output (any of digital optical, coaxial, analog stereo) VOL. Audio;;;;;;AV5 L SL SW C R SR Input sources By selecting an input source with the AV1-6 key and AUDIO key, audio from audio devices is output from the unit. HDMI1-4, AV1-2 Settings HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO 8 Press OPTION. All settings have been completed. When switching the input source to “AV2” with the AV2 key, video and audio from the video device are output from the unit. En 23 1 2 3 4 Connecting playback devices 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas 6 7 8 Connecting to the jack on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a video camera and a game console. Be sure to stop the device and turn down the volume before connecting it to the unit. BD DVD INPUT TV CD PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect supplied indoor FM antenna and an AM antenna. AM antenna FM antenna RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT PORTABLE VIDEO V L L AUDIO R The unit (rear) R ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM R FRON FM PR AUDIO OUT 75Ω Audio output PB VIDEO Y Portable audio player MONITOR OUT VIDEO MONITOR OUT Assembling and connecting the AM antenna V Video output AUDIO L R Audio output Video camera By selecting input source as “V-AUX” with the V-AUX key, audio and video from the connected device are output from the unit. • To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack. • When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted. Press and hold Insert Release • From the AM antenna, take some wires, only the number needed for connections. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connecting recording devices 7 Connecting the power cable 8 6 Connecting recording devices 7 Connecting the power cable Use AV OUT jacks to connect video and audio recording devices. Selected incoming analog audio/video signals are output through AV OUT jacks. After all connections are complete, connect the power plug to the outlet. Plug into a wall outlet • When recording video/audio of the video device, use AV5-6 jacks or VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit to connect video devices. R SURROUND L • When recording audio of the audio device, use any of AV5-6 jacks, AUDIO jacks or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit to connect audio devices. SUBWOOFER The unit (rear) Video input (Analog video) ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO AM FM V V L L R R PR • The figure of the power plug may differ depending upon regions. 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OU L R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO Video/audio device AV OUT AV OUT jacks Audio input (Analog stereo) En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 The YPAO microphone (supplied) detects the status of speaker connections and the distance between these speakers and the listening position, and adjusts the volume balance and the tone settings automatically (YPAO: Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer). 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER TV CD DIRECT - After completing the connection of a TV, speakers, and so on, start YPAO RADIO - The test tone is output at a high volume while measuring. Please take care that measurement. the test tone does not frighten any small children. Also, avoid using YPAO at OPTION SETUP The unit (front) • Be aware of the following when using YPAO. SCENE BD DVD your listening position. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SLEEP 4 Set the YPAO microphone at the height of your ear in night, so as to not make your neighbors troubled. VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE Cursor keys - Keep your room quiet while measuring. ENTER - Do not connect headphones to the unit. YPAO microphone listening position - YPAO can be performed by viewing the front display of the unit. MODE Preparation before using YPAO 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 4 8 ENT 1 Press RECEIVER to turn on the unit. 2 Turn on the TV, and then select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT jack of the unit. 3 Turn on the subwoofer, and then set the volume of the subwoofer to half. The cross-over frequency is set to maximum if it is present. VOLUME MIN MAX Ear height Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. We recommend using a tripod to adjust the height. You can use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. The following display appears on the TV monitor and front display. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX • When a subwoofer that supports the automatic standby function (turn off automatically during no signals input) is used, disable the function before going to the next step. • To cancel the measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone before measuring or press the cursor key ( ) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) Starting the measurement CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 2 Confirm that “Save / Exit” is selected and then press ENTER. Start the measurement by following these steps. HDMI 1 2 3 4 • To confirm the measurement result, select “Result.” For details, refer to the V-AUX V VAUX [A] • YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK “Confirming the measurement result” (p.28). room. • While measuring, keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the room. It takes TUNER USB approximately 3 minutes to finish this measurement. FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 Confirm that “Start” is selected, and then press TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP SETUP. DIRECT The measurement starts in 10 seconds. Press ENTER if you want to start the measurement immediately. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO SETUP OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE • To cancel the measurement, press RETURN to stop temporarily, press ENTER, select “EXIT” and then press ENTER. • To retry the measurement from the temporary stop, select “RETRY” and then 3 Confirm that “SAVE” is selected, and then press the ENTER. press ENTER. MODE 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 4 The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, press the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and then press ENTER. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE • If an error message (such as “E-1:No Front SP”) or a warning message (such as “W-1:Out of Phase”) appears, refer to “Error messages” or “Warning messages” (p.29, 30). 4 Remove the YPAO microphone. All settings for the speakers have been completed. CAUTION • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. Protect YPAO microphone from high temperatures (such as near AV equipment) and direct sunlight. En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) Confirming the measurement result CODE SET 2 Press the cursor keys ( Confirm the YPAO measurement result. HDMI 1 2 3 1 After measurement, press the cursor keys to select 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] “Result,” and then press ENTER. A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ) to select an item. Wiring Displays the condition of the polarity of each connected speaker. “Normal”: Speakers are connected at the normal polarity. (+ and -) “Reverse”: Speakers are connected at the opposite side of normal polarity. (+ and -) Size Displays the size of the connected speakers. “Large”: The connected speaker has the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. “Small”: The connected speaker does not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. The value displayed above “SWFR” describes the cross over frequency of the subwoofer. Distance Displays the distance between connected speakers and the listening position. Level Displays the result of the adjustment of output level of connected speakers. The following display appears. USB FM / The red-box indicates the speaker that has a problem in the following items. For details on remedy of each problem, refer to “Warning messages” (p.30). SOURCE RECEIVER TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Cursor keys MODE ENTER RETURN 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 Red-boxed message indicates a speaker that has a problem. 1 Measurement items 2 Measurement result for each speaker ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • The speaker indicated with red box shows that it may have a certain problem. Check the connection or placement, and if necessary, perform YPAO again referring “Warning messages” (p.30). 3 To return the previous screen after confirmation, press ENTER or RETURN. • (If no problem with the result) Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then confirm that “SAVE” is selected and press ENTER to finish the YPAO. • (If some problem with the result) Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and ENTER, and then press the cursor key ( ) to select “CANCEL” and ENTER. To restart the YPAO measurement, select “Start.” To finish the YPAO, select “Exit.” En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message can be confirmed and controlled by viewing both a TV monitor and the front display. ■ Procedure to exit YPAO 1 Check the contents of error message, and then press ENTER. 2 Press the cursor key ( ) to select “EXIT (Exit)” from the following choices, and then press ENTER. YPAO ENHANCER iPod CHARGE SLEEP STEREO TUNED E-1:NO FRNT SP TV monitor Front display Choices: PROCEED (Proceed) (E-5, E-9 only), “RETRY (Retry),” “EXIT (Exit)” VOL. PL L SL SW C PR R SR 3 Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Exit (Exit)” from the following choices, and then press ENTER. Choices: Start (Start), Exit (Exit) 4 Remove the YPAO microphone. ■ Cause and remedy for each error message Error message Cause Remedy E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) Either of surround speakers is not detected. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart YPAO for an accurate measurement. Selecting “PROCEED (Proceed)” allows you to continue measuring, but may not achieve the optimal results. We recommend selecting “RETRY (Retry)” or “EXIT (Exit)” to retry YPAO again from the beginning. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and select “RETRY (Retry)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to restart the measurement. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Select “PROCEED (Proceed)” in step 2 of “Procedure to exit YPAO” to resume the measurement. Select “RETRY (Retry)” to restart the measurement from first. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. Perform YPAO again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Follow “Procedure to exit YPAO” to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. After removing problems, turn on the unit, and then perform YPAO again. En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) Warning messages Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results. However, we recommend that you perform YPAO again for the optimal speaker settings. The speaker indicator that has a problem flashes. YPAO ENHANCER iPod CHARGE STEREO TUNED W-1:PHASE TV monitor SLEEP VOL. PL L SL SW C PR R SR Front display ■ Cause and remedy for each warning message Warning message W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) Cause Any of the speaker cables may be connected with the reversed polarity (+/-). Any of the speakers is placed too far from the listening position. There are a significant volume differences between the speakers. Remedy a b c d e Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Wiring” (p.28). Check the connection of the speaker with warning. Press RETURN to return to the previous screen. Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER. (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER. (If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER. f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO. g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and reconnect the speaker. After reconnecting, perform YPAO again. When using the speakers that are designed with reverse polarity for better performance, this warning may appear even if the speakers are connected properly. a b c d e Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Distance” (p.28). Check the placement of the speaker with warning. Press RETURN to return to the previous screen. Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER. (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER. (If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER. f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO. g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and relocate the speaker. After relocating, perform YPAO again. a b c d e Check the speaker with warning (indicated with red box) in “Level” (p.28). Check the connection of the speaker with warning. Also check the use environment, or the volume of the subwoofer. Press RETURN to return to the previous screen. Press the cursor key ( ) to select “Save / Exit” and press ENTER. (If some trouble): Select “EXIT (Exit)” and press ENTER. (If no trouble): Select “SAVE (Save)” and press ENTER. f Remove the YPAO microphone to finish YPAO. g (If some trouble) Turn off the unit and resolve the problem. After resolving the problem, perform YPAO again. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar as possible. En 30 PLAYBACK CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Basic playback procedure HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX [A] Input selection keys AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING INFO SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SLEEP SCENE CD RADIO 1 Turn on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.) connected to the unit. 2 Use the Input selection keys to select the input source. 3 Switch the input source on TV according to the type source, or select a radio station. VOLUME POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH ENT MUTE 120 min. 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. Off • The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on. Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external device. Switching the information displayed on the front display For details on FM/AM tuning and playing the iPod, Bluetooth devices or USB devices, refer to the following pages. 1 Press INFO on the remote control or front panel VOLUME DISPLAY A Sleep timer function switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed. Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function as follows. of video signal (such as HDMI, Component video signal) output from the playback device. 4 Play the external device selected as the input OPTION Switching the sleep timer • • • • Listening to FM/AM (p.38) Playing back songs with iPod (p.43) Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices (p.50) Playing back songs with USB storage devices (p.52) 5 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume level. • Press MUTE to turn the mute on. Press MUTE again to turn the mute off. • High-frequency/low-frequency output can be adjusted in the “Option” menu repeatedly. The information (such as the selected input, sound program, surround decoder, FM/AM frequency) displayed on the front display is switched. ■ Information for each input The information displayed the front display varies depending on the selected input. Input sources except for TUNER, DOCK (for wired iPod) and USB are selected: Input DSP Program Audio Decoder (p.57) or with TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.7). • To correct the volume differences between each input source, adjust the parameter in “Volume Trim” of the “Option” menu (p.57). TUNER is selected: Frequency DSP Program Audio Decoder • When receiving Radio Data System (U.K. and Europe models only) Program Service Program Type Frequency Audio Decoder Radio Text Clock Time DSP Program DOCK (for wired iPod) or USB is selected: Song Artist Album DSP Program Audio Decoder En 31 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/ RECEIVER Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER TUNING TV CD 1 Press SCENE. 1 Do the following steps to select the settings that you RADIO SCENE • Selecting the input source (p.31) • Selecting the sound program (p.33) SCENE synchronization (p.70) SCENE Input BD/DVD HDMI1 STRAIGHT Off On TV AV4 STRAIGHT On On CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off Off RADIO TUNER 5ch Stereo On Off VOLUME MODE Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37) Sound program/ surround decoder (p.33) DISPLAY A MUTE • Enabling/disabling Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37) Default settings for each SCENE are as follows. OPTION POP-UP MENU want to register for SCENE. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Changing the settings for the SCENE function The registered settings on SCENE that you pressed are reflected. When the unit is in standby mode, press this key to turn it on. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SLEEP With the SCENE function, an input source and registered settings (the sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music Enhancer, etc.) can be selected with a single key. • Enabling/disabling the SCENE synchronization function (p.70) 2 Press and hold SCENE on the remote control or front panel until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel. VOL. 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE 4 When external devices, such as a TV or BD/DVD player compatible with the HDMI control function, are connected to the unit, the HDMI control functions are enabled on the unit and the external devices and “SCENE” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” for the corresponding SCENE, operations of the external device may be reflected by switching SCENE as follows. • TV is turned on. • TV is switched to a video input source that is connected to the unit. SET Complete L SL SW C R SR When the input source setting of each SCENE is changed, the corresponding SCENE key setting on the remote control also needs to be changed. Refer step 3 to configure the setting for the remote control. 3 (If necessary) Press and hold the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/ RECEIVER blinks twice. • External device starts playback. • Apply the corresponding remote control code to the input selection key to • The SCENE synchronization setting can be set for each SCENE. For details, refer to the “SCENE” (p.70) in the “Setup” menu. control the playback device with the unit’s remote control. For details on how to apply the remote control code, refer to “Registering remote control codes for external device operations” (p.75). En 32 Enjoying the desired sound field effect CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and sound decoders. Sound programs can make sounds richer, be played on the stereo and more. Choose a sound program that sounds best with the source you are playing back. 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM Selecting suitable sound programs for movies (p.34) USB AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE CD MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT Press MOVIE repeatedly. Selecting suitable sound programs for music or stereo playback (p.35) Press MUSIC repeatedly. RADIO Selecting the surround decoder (p.36) OPTION Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly. VOLUME Switching to the straight decoding mode (p.37) DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to switch the straight decoding mode between on and off. Turning on the direct mode (p.37) 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE 4 Press DIRECT repeatedly to switch the direct mode between on and off. Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37) Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch Compressed Music Enhancer between on and off. Compressed Music Enhancer can be also switched between on and off in the “Option” menu (p.57). • The settings for sound programs and the surround decoder can be configured in “DSP” (p.65) in the “Setup” menu. • The sound program can be applied separately to each input. • When playing back the audio that is DTS Express or has over a 96 kHz sampling rate, straight decoding mode (p.37) turns on automatically. • The speaker indicator on the front display (p.8) can be used to confirm which jack is outputting audio currently. En 33 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room. Sound program categories “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Sci-Fi L SL SW C R SR Programs • When DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is played back, it is decoded by normal ❏ ENTERTAINMENT DTS format. ■ Sound programs suitable for video contents (MOVIE) Sound programs suitable for video contents, such as movies, TV programs and video games are included. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more clear and spatial sound field. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. ❏ MOVIE Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. En 34 ■ Sound programs/stereo reproduction suitable for audio contents (MUSIC) Include suitable sound programs for listening to music sources such as CDs. ❏ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finish as a normal standard for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. Hall in Vienna This sound program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❏ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates a live venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a seat in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a live rock music venue in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field in front of the stage in The Bottom Line, a once famous New York jazz club. The venue can seat 300 people ranging from left to right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❏ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front speakers. (CINEMA DSP is not used.) 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. En 35 ■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER The CINEMA DSP 3D creates virtual speakers by using front speakers, center speakers and surround speakers, which brings you into a stereoscopic sound field. When a sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 5ch stereo) is selected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is turned on automatically in the following situations: HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET • “Center” and “Surround” in the “Setup” menu are set to “Large” or “Small” (p.62). TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT When using a surround decoder, audio sources can be played back with up to 5.1-channel. For details, refer to “Glossary” (p.84). 1 Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder. By pressing SUR. DECODE repeatedly, the type of decoder changes. SUR.DECODE ENHANCER SLEEP Enjoying multi-channel sounds (surround decoder) DIRECT Pro Logic CINEMA DSP 3D indicator lights up SCENE CD VOL. • “CINEMA DSP 3D” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (p.65). RADIO VOL. OPTION Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources. PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for movies. PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for music. PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder. This is suitable for games. 3 VOLUME Hall in Vienna SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE • When headphones are connected, the CINEMA DSP 3D is not available. MODE 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR 4 ■ Enjoying sound programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Without any surround speakers, only by using front side speakers, the unit creates virtual speakers, which recreate the sound field from the back automatically. Select the sound program (except for 2ch stereo and 5ch stereo) when surround speakers are not connected. Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. • When headphones are connected, the Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available. Instead, SILENT CINEMA becomes effective (p.37). En 36 Playback without sound field effects (straight decoding mode) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 By using the straight decoding mode, sounds from each channel included in input sources are output from each speaker without sound field processing. When 2-channel sources such as CD are selected, they are played back by stereo sound through the front left and right speakers. When multi-channel playback sources are selected, they are played back without applying sound field effects, using an appropriate decoder. 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO OPTION STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 1 Press STRAIGHT. By pressing STRAIGHT repeatedly, the straight decoding mode switches to enable and disable. Playing back the compressed audio dynamically (Compressed Music Enhancer) Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound by adding depth and width and creates dynamic playback closer to the original sound. This mode can be used along with CINEMA DSP. 1 Press ENHANCER. By pressing ENHANCER repeatedly, Compressed Music Enhancer switches to enable and disable. Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer is active. VOL. VOLUME DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV VOL MUTE ENHANCER VOL. R SR Enhancer On Playing back fidelity sound of the selected source (direct mode) 1 INPUT L SL L SL SW C R SR MUTE MODE TV STRAIGHT SW C ENT When the direct mode is enabled, the circuitry regardless of playback (such as the front display or CINEMA DSP) is disabled to reduce noise and play back and reproduce original sound. • Compressed Music Enhancer is not available for the following audio formats: - Signals with a sampling rate over 48 kHz - High Definition Audio bitstream TV CH 1 Press DIRECT. • Compressed Music Enhancer can be also turned on/off in the “Option” menu (p.57). By pressing DIRECT repeatedly, the direct mode switches to enable and disable. VOL. DIRECT L Enjoying surround audio with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) R • When the direct mode is enabled, there are some restrictions as follows. - Sound programs cannot be selected. Connect headphones to the PHONES jack, and then select sound programs and surround decoders. Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy a sound field. - Tone control cannot be adjusted. - The “Option” menu and “Setup” menu cannot be operated. - Front display screen gets dimmer for reducing noise (during no operation). En 37 Listening to FM/AM CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 When tuning a radio, select a frequency or a registered station. ■ Receiving an FM broadcast that has a poor signal • To tune into the radio station, connect the antenna in advance (p.24). It may be possible to receive an unstable FM broadcast by switching from stereo receiving to monaural receiving. V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER TUNER FM AM USB FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING TUNING frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP • FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE • When the radio cannot get good reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna. DIRECT 1 Press MODE. By pressing MODE, the receiving mode is switched to monaural or stereo. VOL. SCENE CD TUNED RADIO OPTION OPTION VOLUME DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE MODE Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press FM or AM to select FM or AM to receive. VOL. 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 4 8 ENT Numeric keys FM87.50MHz 3 Select the frequency with the following keys. TUNING: Selects a frequency. Press and hold this key for approximately a second to search for a station automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly with numbers (For example, press “9,” “8,” “5” and “0” to select a station on 98.50 MHz.). • “Wrong Station!” appears when a frequency is out of receivable range. L SL SW C L SL SW C R SR Registering favorite stations (Preset tuning) Up to 40 FM/AM stations can be registered as preset stations. Registered stations can be chosen easily by selecting the preset numbers. ■ Registering FM stations automatically Up to 40 FM stations with strong signals can be registered automatically (Auto Preset). • AM stations cannot be registered automatically. Use manual station preset (p.39). 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. OPTION VOL. VOL. Tone Control STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz FM Mode:Mono R SR “TUNED” lights up when a broadcast is received from a station. “STEREO” lights up when stereo broadcast is received from a station. Continues to the next page En 38 3 Press the cursor keys ( CODE SET 1 2 3 4 A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING TUNER PRESET MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP TV CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU VOL. 01:FM 87.50MHz 5 (If necessary) To change the preset number from Auto Preset starts in approximately 5 seconds after the preset number is selected. OPTION SETUP READY which to start the Auto Preset function, press PRESET or the cursor keys. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Cursor keys ENTER RETURN When the preset number is not selected, “READY” appears on the display, and then Auto Preset starts in approximately 5 seconds. MUTE Selecting a preset number MODE READY 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 1 Tune the station that you want to register, referring to “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.38). 2 Press MEMORY for 2 seconds or longer. 4 Press ENTER. V-AUX V VAUX 4 ■ Registering stations manually Select stations manually and register them to the preset numbers. VOL. Auto Preset HDMI [A] / ) to select “Auto Preset.” OPTION SOURCE RECEIVER The station is registered automatically to the preset number “01” for the first registration. The station will be registered to the next preset number after the one registered most recently after the second registration. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR Preset number • To select the preset number for registration, press MEMORY once while receiving the station that you want to register. Press PRESET or numeric keys to select the preset number, and then press MEMORY again. VOL. 02:FM 87.50MHz VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:Empty Currently selected preset number L SL SW C R SR TV Empty, or the frequency currently registered INPUT TV VOL MUTE ■ Selecting a registered station • To cancel the Auto Preset, press RETURN. During Auto Preset SEARCH Choose the station that you want to listen to from stations that are registered to the preset numbers. VOL. 02:FM 98.10MHz 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input During registration source. VOL. STEREO TUNED 02:FM98.50MHz C When Auto Preset is completed FINISH VOL. Auto Preset The “Option” menu closes automatically when registration is completed. Continues to the next page En 39 2 Press PRESET to select the preset number. CODE SET After pressing PRESET once, numeric keys can be used for inputting the preset number (01 to 40) directly. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 VOL. STEREO TUNED V-AUX V VAUX [A] 02:FM87.50MHz A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET R SR TUNER TUNING PRESET MEMORY • When an invalid preset number is input, “Wrong Num.” appears on the display. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT INFO ENHANCER DIRECT • When the preset number that is not registered yet is entered, “Empty” appears on the display. SCENE CD RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER POP-UP MENU OPTION ■ Clearing a registered station Cursor keys Clear a radio station (preset station) registered to a preset number. ENTER DISPLAY A 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. MUTE MODE 1 SW C 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV 4 8 ENT Numeric keys OPTION VOL. TV VOL Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time” when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. TV CH 3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to display “Clear Preset.” OPTION You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time.” 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend that you use the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.38). 2 Press INFO repeatedly until the desired information Information on the display changes as you press the key. The kind of information is displayed for a while and then the information is displayed. Type of information VOL. Clear Preset 4 Press ENTER. CLEAR ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information is displayed. Tone Control INPUT MUTE (U.K. and Europe models only) • When no stations are registered, “No presets” appears on the display. FM SLEEP L SL Radio Data System tuning Program Service Displays the name of the Radio Data System program service currently being received. Program Type Displays the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. Radio Text Displays the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. Clock Time Displays the current time. DSP Program Displays the currently selected sound program. Audio Decoder Displays the currently selected surround decoder. Frequency Displays the received tuner frequency. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM 98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR 5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the preset number that you want to clear, and then press ENTER. Description To clear multiple preset numbers, repeat the same procedure. 6 Press OPTION to finish this operation. Continues to the next page En 40 Front display (when “Program Type” selected) CODE SET Frequency SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 4 VOL. CLASSICS V-AUX V VAUX [A] Status 9850 HDMI 4 Press ENTER to start the search function. L SL SW C R SR READY ENHANCER iPod CHARGE SLEEP VOL. STEREO TUNED PL L SL TP FM 87.50MHz SW C PR R SR A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY Program Type TUNER • “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when “Program Type,” “Radio PRESET TUNING Text,” or “Clock Time” is displayed. That shows this unit is receiving data (or stopping receiving data). If the data is receivable, the corresponding information is SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP displayed after a while. DIRECT TV CD OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. RADIO OPTION SETUP • By pressing RETURN right before or during a search, it will return to the • “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” do not appear SCENE BD DVD 4 8 The transmission search will begin upward from the current frequency in approximately 5 seconds. Or, when the status indicator reads “READY,” you can begin the search immediately by pressing ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN ■ Automatic traffic information reception When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically search for and receive transmission from traffic information broadcast stations. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. ENT OPTION ENHANCER SLEEP iPod CHARGE STEREO TUNED VOL. / ) to start a search in the specified direction. If no operation is performed for more than 5 seconds, a search automatically starts upward. - Cursor key ( ): Searches upward from the current frequency. - Cursor key ( ): Searches downward from the current frequency. When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the display and the “Option” menu will close. FINISH ENHANCER iPod CHARGE STEREO TUNED SLEEP VOL. MUTE TP FM101.30MHz PL L SL SW C PR R SR MUTE PL L SL Tone Control 3 Press the cursor keys ( SW C PR R SR / ) to select “TrafficProgram.” OPTION “Option” menu. • When the status is “READY,” use the cursor keys ( Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency) • If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not Found” will appear on the display, and the “Option” menu will shortly close. ENHANCER iPod CHARGE STEREO TUNED SLEEP VOL. MUTE TrafficProgram PL L SL SW C PR R SR En 41 Combining audio from the radio with video from an external device CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 6 Press OPTION to finish this operation. HDMI 1 2 3 While listening to the radio, favorite videos can be output on a TV monitor. 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] • Switch the input source on TV depending the settings to play back the video. A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input TUNER 2 Press OPTION. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP source, and then choose the station that you want to listen to. OPTION DIRECT CD RADIO OPTION OPTION VOLUME ENTER POP-UP MENU 3 Press the cursor keys ( OPTION / ) to select “Video Out.” VOL. Video Out MUTE 4 Press ENTER. MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A VOL. Tone Control SCENE TV CH TUNER VOL. Video;;;;;;Off ENT 5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired input video source. TUNER VOL. Video;;;;HDMI1 Selectable video inputs HDMI1-4 A video signal input from HDMI1-4 is output. AV1-6 A video signal input from AV1-6 is output. V-AUX A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the front display panel is output. Off (default) No video signals input from external devices is output. En 42 Playing back songs with iPod By using the USB cable supplied with iPod, optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) or optional Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10), play back songs from connected iPod with the unit. • In this manual, both iPod and iPhone are collectively represented as “iPod.” When there is no explanation ■ Using a USB cable to connect an iPod Connect the iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. Features that is specific to either of them, “iPod” means both iPod and iPhone. • Some functions may not be available depending on types or versions of iPod, or depending on types of docks. • Enjoying clear sounds by transmitting the digital audio signals input from iPod. • Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control. Functional differences depending on the way of connection USB cable supplied with iPod Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) • Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a TV monitor. Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10) Audio output ✓ ✓ ✓ Video output — ✓* — Operation with remote control of the unit ✓ ✓ — Operation with iPod ✓ ✓ ✓ Operation on TV monitor ✓ ✓ — Charging ✓ ✓ ✓ Charging during standby mode — ✓ ✓ Supported iPod Connecting an iPod Supported iPod iPod touch, iPod nano (2 gen. to 6 gen.), iPod classic, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone Procedure Connect an iPod as follows. iPod touch iPod nano (2 gen. to 6 gen.) iPod classic iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch iPod nano iPod classic iPod with video iPod with color display iPod with click wheel iPod mini iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. iPod touch iPod nano iPod classic iPod with video iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone * The video signal is output from the VIDEO jack of MONITOR OUT on the rear of the unit. Continues to the next page En 43 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front CODE SET panel. SOURCE RECEIVER Procedure Connect an iPod as follows. Refer to the manual for iPod dock also. HDMI 1 2 3 4 PHONES INPUT USB TONE CONTROL • For connecting iPhone, use the YDS-12. V-AUX V VAUX [A] SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB 1 Turn the unit to the standby mode, and then connect the iPod dock to the DOCK jack. DOCK USB Keep the iPod dock as far away from the unit as possible. FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT VOL. ENHANCER SLEEP Connected SCENE CD ARC DIRECT L SL SW C HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA DOCK R SR COMPONENT VIDEO AM FM PR RADIO 75Ω OPTION VOLUME DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE 3 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. 4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start • To operate with iPod itself (p.49) 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT TV VOL TV CH MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO The unit (rear) Yamaha iPod universal dock 2 Connect the iPod to the iPod dock, and then turn on this unit. • Video signals cannot be output using the USB cable supplied with iPod. TV INPUT VIDEO Y playback. • To operate with a TV monitor (p.46) MODE PB • If noises are heard while using iPhone, change the position of the iPhone. MUTE ■ Using the iPod dock to connect an iPod Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod universal dock. DOCK VOL. iPodconnected L SL R SR 3 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. 4 Select the content of the iPod, and then start Features playback. • Playing back not only songs but also video. • To operate with a TV monitor (p.46) • Operating iPod using the unit’s remote control. • To operate with iPod itself (p.49) • Displaying the content list and playback informations of the iPod on a TV monitor. SW C • When the iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod can be charged. Supported iPod You can set whether or not to charge the iPod when the unit is in the standby iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPod with color display, iPod with click wheel, iPod mini, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.58) on the “Option” menu. En 44 ■ Using the iPod wireless system to connect an iPod CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Connect the iPod to the unit with the optional Yamaha iPod wireless system. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 Connect the iPod to the iPod wireless system (transmitter). Wait for a while until the following display appears on the front display. V-AUX V VAUX [A] VOL. A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM USB AM PRESET INFO TUNING MEMORY Features DOCK • Connecting iPod to the unit wirelessly and playing back audio source in real time without reducing the quality. • Volume level or power-on/off operation of the unit can be linked synchronized with operations of iPod itself. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT Supported iPod RADIO iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPhone4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone SCENE CD OPTION VOLUME DISPLAY A MUTE MODE 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV L SL SW C R SR 4 Select the content with the iPod, and then start playback. The unit turns on automatically, and then “DOCK” is selected as the input source. • The video or content list of iPod cannot be displayed on a TV monitor. Procedure POP-UP MENU iPodconnected 4 • You can set whether operations for iPod link with operations for the unit Connect an iPod as follows. The iPod can be controlled using iPod itself. Refer to the manual for iPod wireless system also. (turning on/off, selecting input sources, and adjusting volume level) in “iPod 1 Disconnect the power cable plug from the outlet, function is set to “Off,” operations for the unit such as turning on and and then connect the iPod wireless system (receiver) to the DOCK jack. Interlock (Interlock)” (p.59) on the “Option” menu. When the interlock selecting the input source, should be controlled manually. • When putting a transmitter connected to the iPod on a receiver, iPod is charged automatically. You can set whether or not to charge iPod when the Keep the iPod wireless system as far away from the unit as possible. INPUT unit is in standby mode, in “Standby Charge” (p.58) on the “Option” menu. CAUTION TV VOL MUTE • When using iPod to adjust the volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud, which causes damage to the unit and speakers. In this case, remove the iPod ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO AM from the iPod wireless system (transmitter) immediately. Set the restriction for FM the maximum volume level in “Max Volume” on “Setup” menu to prevent PR 75Ω PB VIDEO excessively loud playback. Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L R 12 A 3 B OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO The unit (rear) Yamaha iPod wireless system (Receiver) 2 Connect the power cable plug to the outlet. En 45 Controlling while watching a TV monitor CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER When connecting iPod with a USB cable or iPod dock, iPod can be controlled with the TV monitor. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 Press the cursor keys to select the content, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing view appears. V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK • To operate an iPod on a TV monitor, connect the unit and TV with an HDMI cable, TUNER FM USB DOCK USB and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of the unit before operation. AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC • An iPod connected to the iPod wireless system cannot be operated on a TV TUNING monitor. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP 1 Select the input source to which the iPod is DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD connected. RADIO When using the USB cable to connect the iPod: OPTION SETUP Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys When using the iPod dock to connect the iPod: • Press RETURN or the cursor key ( Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. • (When using the iPod dock) To play back the video stored on iPod, connect MUTE The following display is for the USB input source. ) to return to the previous screen. the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. When playing back, switch the MODE input source on TV to the composite video input. 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • (When using the iPod dock) While playing back video stored on iPod, 4 switch the input source on TV to the HDMI input connected to the unit to 8 display Browse view or Now Playing view. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the iPod is connected to the unit properly. En 46 ■ Browse view CODE SET ■ Now Playing view SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION SETUP 1 Play icon 1 Play icon VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.48) and playback status (playback/pause) are displayed. 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV VOL List of iPod contents is displayed. Press the cursor keys to select the content, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Current menu number/Numbers of all menu items TV INPUT 4 5 Operation menu icon Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to execute the selection. Menu Settings for shuffle playback and repeat playback (p.48) and playback status (playback/pause) are displayed. 2 Song information 2 List name 3 Content list 1 MUTE Cursor keys The name of an artist, an album and a song and elapsed time/remaining time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item to be scrolled. 3 Album image 4 Operation menu icon Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Explanation Explanation Starts or pauses playback. 10 Pages Up Goes 10 pages backwards. Playback Control 1 Page Up Skips to the beginning of the song now playing, or to the song previously playing. Scrolls the list to the next or previous page. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Down Goes 10 pages forwards. Return Returns to the previous display. Now Playing Switches the display to the Now Playing view. When playing no contents, this menu is not available. Screen Off Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to display the Now Playing view while song or video content is being played back. If no content is being played back, the Browse view is displayed. Skips to the beginning of the next song. Browse Switches the display to the Browse view. Screen Off Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or RETURN to return to the Now Playing view. • iPod can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote control (p.48). • If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling iPod viewing only the front display, press the cursor key ( ) to return to control screen. En 47 ■ Controlling with the remote control CODE SET HDMI 1 2 3 Available remote control keys A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY DOCK USB ENHANCER DIRECT VOL. Parameters L SL SW C R SR Explanations Off Turns off the shuffle function. Songs Plays back songs in random order. Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.47). Albums Plays back albums in random order. Shuffle icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.47). Skips to the beginning of the now playing song, or to the previous playing song. Off Turns off the repeat function. Skips to the next song. One Plays back a song repeatedly. Repeat One icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.47). All Plays back all songs in a directory. Repeat All icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.47). Shuffle TUNING MUSIC SLEEP Items Pauses playback. External device operation keys / ) to adjust the setting. Repeat;;;;;One Starts playing back the selected song. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Explanations Stops playback. PRESET DOCK 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] 4 Press the cursor keys ( Without using “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view, iPod can be operated directly with the remote control. SOURCE RECEIVER Searches backwards, while the button is pressed. Searches forwards, while the button is pressed. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE Repeat ■ Shuffle/repeat playback Make a setting for playing iPod in random order or repeatedly. MODE External device operation keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH ENT 1 Select “USB” or “DOCK” as the input source, and then press OPTION. OPTION 5 Press OPTION to close the menu. VOL. Tone Control L SL SW C R SR MUTE 2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Shuffle” or “Repeat.” OPTION VOL. Repeat L SL SW C R SR 3 Press ENTER. DOCK VOL. Repeat;;;;;Off L SL SW C R SR • Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu. En 48 Controlling by iPod itself CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Control iPod to play contents. HDMI 1 2 3 1 Press MODE. 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER The display on the TV monitor disappears, and then operations can be controlled by the iPod. Press MODE again to return to the TV display (the Browse view.) USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING 2 Select the content with the iPod, and then start SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP playback. DIRECT For details on operation with the iPod, refer to the operation manual of your iPod. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE MODE MODE External device operation keys 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH ■ Controlling with the remote control iPod can be operated directly with the remote control. Available remote control keys Explanations Selects the content. Cursor keys 4 8 ENTER/ Cursor key ( ) RETURN/ Cursor key ( ) Confirms the selected menu. ENT Returns to the previous menu. MUTE Starts or pauses playing back the selected song. Stops playback. External device operation keys Searches backwards, while the button is pressed. Searches forwards, while the button is pressed. Skips to the beginning of the now playing song, or to the previous playing song. Skips to the next song. En 49 Playing back songs with Bluetooth devices CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER DOCK USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET MEMORY ENHANCER OPTION VOLUME ENTER eight Bluetooth devices. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing setting for the devices.) Once pairing is completed, communication between the Bluetooth device device which has not been used for the longest period will be deleted. MUTE Therefore, when Bluetooth devices are connected, they need to be paired with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU • The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to the first time, it is necessary to do pairing (registration for matching two Bluetooth and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is established by only connecting them. RADIO OPTION RETURN • When connecting your Bluetooth device to a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for DIRECT SCENE CD Pairing Bluetooth devices Connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver MODE 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 INPUT 4 1 Turn the unit to standby mode, and then connect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver to the DOCK jack. TV When your Bluetooth device is connected to a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for the first time, or the pairing settings are deleted, it is necessary to do pairing. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SLEEP Use an optional Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10) to play back songs with Bluetooth devices. Refer to the manual for the Bluetooth receivers or your Bluetooth devices also. This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Bluetooth profile. Keep the distance from the unit to the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver as far as possible. TV VOL MUTE 1 Press DOCK to select the “DOCK” as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth device, and then set to the pairing mode. 3 Press OPTION and then press the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to select “Pairing,” and then press ENTER. The searching for the device starts. When the Bluetooth device recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, the name of device (such as “YBA-10 YAMAHA”) appears on the Bluetooth device list. VOL. ARC HDMI OUT DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 ANTENNA DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO AM Searching... FM PR 75Ω PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) AV 3 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 • Press RETURN to cancel the searching. • Instead of the step 3, it is also possible to press and hold MEMORY to start R AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO the searching. To cancel the searching, press MEMORY again. The unit (rear) Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver 2 Turn on the unit. Continues to the next page En 50 4 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from CODE SET the Bluetooth device list, and then enter a pass key “0000.” SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 When the pairing is completed, “Completed” appears. V-AUX V VAUX [A] DOCK A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER DOCK L SL AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET SLEEP TUNING R SR VOL. BTconnected L SL SW C R SR • Depending on Bluetooth devices, “BT connected” appears after pairing. In this case, at the same time with pairing, wired connection is also completed. receiver, the Bluetooth device, which has the Bluetooth function enabled and ENHANCER Therefore, only by starting playback with the Bluetooth device, audio output was connected most recently, is automatically connected to the Bluetooth from the unit automatically. wireless audio receiver. When the device wireless audio receiver is TV CD DIRECT RADIO OPTION SETUP OPTION DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU MUTE Cursor keys MODE ENTER 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 5 Press OPTION to close the menu. Playing back songs by connecting to the Bluetooth device VOLUME ENTER 4 8 connect them by operating Bluetooth device. • ”Not found” appears when the wireless connection is not established. Confirm the following, and then retry the connection. - Both the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver are - The Bluetooth device is turned on, and the Bluetooth function of that device is set to enable. - The Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) from the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 4 Play back songs with the Bluetooth device. ENT TV TV CH connected to another device, disable the Bluetooth function of the device or paired. When pairing is completed, perform the wireless connection between the Bluetooth device and the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. While connecting, when playback is started with the Bluetooth device, audio is output from the unit. INPUT TV VOL • When some Bluetooth devices are paired with the Bluetooth wireless audio SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SCENE MUTE When the wireless connection is completed, “BT connected” appears. USB FM BD DVD Completed / ) repeatedly to select “Connect,” and then press ENTER. DOCK VOL. SW C 3 Press the cursor keys ( • Depending on the Bluetooth device, a wireless connection is established automatically by controlling the Bluetooth device. In this case, following steps from 2-3 is unnecessary. • Select “Disconnect” in step 3 to disconnect the wireless connection. 1 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. En 51 Playing back songs with USB storage devices CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 When a USB device is connected to the unit, audio files in the device, such as WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC, can be played back. 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM USB USB Controlling while watching a TV monitor While watching a TV monitor, selecting songs and playback are operated. • This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 48 kHz for USB storage AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC devices. TUNING and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI OUT jack of SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP Connecting a USB storage device DIRECT SCENE CD VOLUME ENTER TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE the unit before operation. This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs). Refer to the manual for your USB device also. RADIO OPTION RETURN • To operate a USB storage device, connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable, 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the front panel. MODE YPAO MIC INFO 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 MEMORY 4 BD DVD • When “No device” appears on the TV monitor, make sure that the USB TV INPUT PHONES USB INPUT TONE CONTROL storage device is connected to the unit properly. TV VOL MUTE SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone 2 Press the cursor keys to select a folder (directory) or a song, and then press ENTER. After selecting a song, playback starts and the Now Playing view appears. • Confirm that the USB storage device is facing the correct way when inserted into the USB port. • For details on connecting an iPod, refer to “Using a USB cable to connect an iPod” (p.43). • When connecting the USB storage device that contents many data files, it may takes long time to load the files. During loading files, “Loading…” is displayed on the front panel and TV monitor. • Press RETURN or the cursor key ( ) to return to the previous screen. • Files that are not compatible with the unit are not displayed. En 52 CODE SET ■ Browse view ■ Now Playing view 1 Play icon 1 Play icon SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys MUTE Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.54) and playback status (playback/pause) are displayed. 2 List name 2 Song information 3 Song list MODE 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 TV 4 The list of songs and folders is displayed (with up to 32 characters). Press the cursor keys to select a song, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Current song number/Numbers of all songs INPUT TV VOL MUTE Settings for random playback and repeat playback (p.54) and playback status (playback/pause) are displayed. The name of an artist, an album and a song tagged with the file and elapsed time are displayed. Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item to be scrolled. 3 Operation menu icon Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. 5 Operation menu icon Menus Press the cursor keys to select the item, and then press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menus 10 Pages Up Explanations Explanations Starts or pauses playback. Playback Control 10 pages backwards. Skips to the beginning of the next song. Skips to the beginning of the song now playing, or to the song previously playing. 1 Page Up Scrolls the list to the next or previous page. Browse Switches the display to the Browse view. Screen Off Closes the Now Playing view. Press ENTER or RETURN to the Now Playing view. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Down Goes 10 pages forwards. Return Returns to the previous display. Now Playing Switches the display to the Now Playing view. When playing no songs, this menu is not available. Screen Off Closes the Browse view. Press ENTER or RETURN to display the Now Playing view while song or video content is being played back. If no content is being played back, the Browse view is displayed. • USB devices can be controlled with the external device operation keys on remote control (p.54). • If “View ON SCREEN” appears on the front display when controlling contents on the USB storage device viewing only the front display, press the cursor key ( ) to return to control screen. En 53 ■ Controlling with the remote control CODE SET HDMI 1 2 3 Enables remote control keys A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM USB INFO External device operation keys MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP DIRECT SCENE CD OPTION OPTION USB Searches backwards, while the button is pressed. RETURN POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE External device operation keys 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 Items ■ Repeat/random playback Make a setting for playing a USB device repeatedly or in random order. TV VOL MUTE • When connecting an iPod with a USB cable, the settings of shuffle playback are available in addition to the repeat playback (p.48). 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. OPTION 3 Press the cursor keys ( Repeat SW C R SR Parameters Explanations Turns off the repeat function. Single Plays back a song repeatedly. Repeat Single icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.53). All Plays back all songs in a folder (directory). Repeat All icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.53). Random Plays back songs in random order. Random icon appears on the Now Playing view (p.53). Repeat 6 Press OPTION to close the menu. VOL. Tone Control OPTION L SL Off 4 TV INPUT / ) to adjust the setting. Repeat;;Single Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU R SR VOL. Skips to the next song. VOLUME ENTER SW C Searches forwards, while the button is pressed. Skips to the beginning of the song now playing, or to the song previously playing. RADIO L SL • Press RETURN to return to the previous display while operating the menu. 5 Press the cursor keys ( Pauses playback. Stops playback. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Repeat;;;;;Off TUNING MEMORY VOL. Explanation Starts playing back the selected song. USB AM PRESET USB 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] 4 Press ENTER. Without using the “operation menu icon” on the Now Playing view, USB devices can be operated directly with the remote control. SOURCE RECEIVER L SL SW C R SR / ) to select “Repeat.” VOL. L SL SW C R SR En 54 Combining a song from a USB storage device (iPod) with video from an external device CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] While listening to a song from a USB device, favorite videos can be output on the TV monitor. A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET USB TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SLEEP 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source, and then play back your desired song. 2 Press OPTION. OPTION DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU 3 Press the cursor keys ( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 L SL • Switch the input source on TV depending the settings to play back the video. Switch the input source on TV to the HDMI input connected to the unit to display Browse view or Now Playing view. SW C R SR VOL. Video Out L SL SW C R SR 4 Press ENTER. USB ENT TV VOL. Video;;;;;;Off INPUT TV VOL .” / ) to select “Video Out.” OPTION MUTE MODE 10 the screen with “ • “Video Out” is also available for iPod connected to the USB port. OPTION VOLUME ENTER • When the Browse view and Now Playing view is displayed on a TV monitor, close VOL. Tone Control RADIO 6 Press OPTION to finish this operation. TV CH L SL SW C R SR MUTE 5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired input video source. USB VOL. Video;;;;V-AUX L SL SW C R SR Selectable video inputs HDMI1-4 A video signal input from HDMI1-4 is output. AV1-6 A video signal input from AV1-6 is output. V-AUX A video signal input from the VIDEO AUX jack on the front display panel is output. Off (default) No signal is output. En 55 Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (Option menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Depending on the input source, configure settings for the function related to playback. An operation for settings is possible with only the front display without using a TV monitor. Therefore, settings can be changed easily as needed. HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM • Only the available settings that can be applied to the selected input are displayed. USB Item • To operate the “Option” menu on the TV monitor, connect the unit and a TV with an AM PRESET INFO TUNING HDMI cable, and change the input source on the TV to the video input from HDMI MEMORY MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP 1 Press OPTION. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys OPTION Tone Control VOL. L SL SW C R SR Front display Description Page Tone Control Adjusts the high-frequency range and lowfrequency range of sounds. 57 Adaptive DRC Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the volume level. 57 Enhancer Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 57 Volume Trim Adjusts the differences of the volume levels when switching the input source. 57 Signal Info Displays information on the current video and audio signal. 58 Audio In Combines video from the selected input source with audio input from other jacks. 22 Video Out Combines audio of the TUNER or USB input with video from other input. Auto Preset Registers FM stations with strong signals automatically in the preset numbers (up to 40). 38 Clear Preset Deletes the registered stations. 40 Traffic Program (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for traffic information with the Radio Data System. 41 Repeat Sets repeat playback of an iPod or USB device. Shuffle Sets shuffle playback of an iPod. 48 Standby Charge Sets whether or not to charge an iPod while the unit is in standby mode. 58 iPod Interlock Sets whether operations for the iPod connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver are in conjunction with operations for the unit. 59 Pairing Pairs Bluetooth devices with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 50 Connect/ Disconnect Connects or disconnects a wireless connection between Bluetooth devices with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 51 OUT jack of the unit before operation. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Available settings in Option menu MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 42, 55 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE TV monitor 2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select the desired setting, and then press ENTER. • Press RETURN to return to the previous screen. 3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to adjust the setting. 4 Press OPTION to finish the setting. 48, 54 En 56 ■ Tone Control ■ Enhancer Adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front speakers. When headphones are connected, adjusts the balance of the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds output from headphones. Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.37). Input sources All (the setting is applied to all input sources) Choices High frequency range (Treble), Low-frequency range (Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to + 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Input sources All (the setting is applied to each input source) Settings Off Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. On Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. • Compressed Music Enhancer can be enabled/disabled with ENHANCER on the remote control as well. Default setting Bypass (0.0 dB) ■ Volume Trim • When you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. The tone control can also be adjusted with the keys on the front panel (p.7). a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass.” b Press PROGRAM to adjust the setting. ■ Adaptive DRC Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the volume level. When it is set to “On,” it is useful for listening to playback at low volume at night. Corrects the volume differences between each input source. Adjust the parameter to reduce any change in volume when switching between input sources. Input sources All (the setting is applied to each input source) • Adjusted value is separately applied to the selected input. Setting range -6.0 dB to 6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default setting 0.0 dB Input sources All (the setting is applied to all input sources) Settings Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically On Off Input Level Volume: low Output Level Output Level When it is set to “On,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low level volume, and becomes wide at a high level volume. On Off Input Level Volume: high En 57 ■ Signal Info ■ Standby Charge Displays information on the current video and audio signals. Sets whether or not to charge an iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless audio receiver while the unit is in standby mode. Input sources HDMI1-4, AV1-4, and the input source set as a TV audio input when ARC is used Items Format (FORMAT) Audio signal format. When this unit is unable to detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to an analog input. Channel (CHAN) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/ surround/ LFE). For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples taken per second when converting an analog signal into a digital signal. Bitrate (B RATE) The number of bits passing a given point per second. Input (V IN) Video input signal format Output (V OUT) Video output signal format. Input sources DOCK (iPod) Settings On (Default) Charges iPod when the unit is in standby mode. Off Does not charge iPod when the unit is in standby mode. • When iPod is connected to the unit with a USB cable, iPod cannot be charged while the unit is in standby mode. Error messages about HDMI. This item appears only when error concerning HDMI occurs. Message (V MSG) HDCP Error (HDCP Error): The connected TV is not compliant to the High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). Make sure that the HDCP compliant TV is connected. Device Over (Device Over): The number of devices connected to HDMI OUT jack exceeded the limitation. Reduce the number of the connected devices. ■ Procedure to switch the items on the front display. 1 Press the cursor keys ( Selected item FORMAT / ) to switch the display of information on the front display. Signal information VOL. Dolby D L SL SW C R SR Front display • The list of all signal information is displayed on a TV monitor. En 58 ■ iPod Interlock (Interlock) Sets whether operations for the iPod connected to the iPod wireless audio receiver are in linked with operations for the unit. Input sources DOCK (iPod) • This setting is available only when the iPod wireless audio receiver is connected. ❏ Power & Input (Pwr&Input) Sets the operation for iPod related to the operation for the unit when adjusting the volume level, such as being turned on and selecting the input source. Settings Off Turns off the interlock function. On (Default) Turns on the interlock function. When starting playback with the iPod, the unit is turned on, and then “DOCK” is selected as the input source. When a few minutes pass after playback is stopped, the unit goes into standby mode. ❏ Volume Sets whether the operation for iPod relates to the operation for the unit when adjusting the volume level. Settings Off Turns off the interlock function. On (Default) Turns on the interlock function. When adjusting the volume level with an iPod, the volume level of the unit is also adjusted. En 59 CONFIGURATIONS CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Configuring various functions (Setup menu) HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER The settings of the unit can be changed from the “Setup” menu displayed on the TV screen. AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING ) to select an item (p.61) • Connect the unit and a TV with an HDMI cable to display the “Setup” menu. If the TV is not connected with an HDMI cable, reconnect it with an HDMI cable. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP 1 Press SETUP. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD / and press ENTER. USB FM MOVIE 3 Press the cursor keys ( TV CD RADIO SETUP OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A ENT When the HDMI control function is enabled on both the unit and a TV that supports the HDMI control, the TV may automatically operate as follows when SETUP is pressed. • The TV turns on. • The video input on the TV is switched to the HDMI input connected to the unit. • The “Setup” menu is displayed on the TV screen. 2 Press the cursor keys ( ), a detail setting menu is displayed. Press RETURN to close the detail settings menu and return to the previous menu screen. / ) to select the menu you want to configure. Menu items • When pressing ENTER to select an item that has a folder icon ( Selected item 4 Press the cursor keys ( / setting and press ENTER. / / ) to adjust the MUTE Selected menu Current settings and folders • Operation procedures vary depending on selected items. For details, refer to • Menus can be selected while the menu cursor is displayed (white box around the menu icon). When configuring the settings, press RETURN repeatedly to be able to select menus. the directions for each setting item. 5 Press SETUP to close the “Setup” menu. • For details on settings in the “Setup” menu, refer to the “Setup menu list” (p.61). En 60 Setup menu list Menu Item Description Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 62 Center Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker. 62 Surround Page Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers. 62 Selects the phase of the subwoofer signals. 62 Configuration Phase Subwoofer Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component produced from speakers set to “Small.” 62 Speaker Extra Bass Selects the speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 63 Distance Separately adjusts the distance between each speaker and the listening position respectively. 63 Level Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. 63 Equalizer Selects an equalizer type. 63 Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. 64 Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output. 64 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for the audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. 65 Max Volume Specify the maximum volume level that can be adjusted by VOLUME on the remote control. 65 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 65 Sound CINEMA DSP 3D Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 65 Program Selects and adjusts a sound program and a decoder. 66 Input Rename Changes the input source name. 68 Auto Power Down Selects the amount of time after no operation is done that the unit enters standby. 68 Dimmer Reduces the brightness of the front display. 68 Short Message Turns the short messages displayed on the TV screen on or off. 68 Memory Guard Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the “Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE. 69 TV Audio Input Selects the input source that receives audio signals from a TV. 70 ARC Turns the Audio Return Channel function (ARC) on or off. 70 Standby Sync Selects the interlocked operation of the unit when the TV is turned off. 70 SCENE Selects whether or not to interlock an external device connected to this unit when selecting the appropriate SCENE. 70 Audio Output Specifies where audio signal is output. 70 Standby Through Specifies whether or not to transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode. 71 Selects the language used for menus and messages output from the unit and displayed on the TV screen. 71 DSP Function HDMI Control HDMI Language En 61 Configuring the speaker settings (Speaker) Adjust parameters for speakers manually. ❏ Surround Selects the size of the surround speakers and whether or not to use the speakers. Settings Large Select this when large surround speakers are connected. Small (Default) Select this when small surround speakers are connected. The subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround channel lowfrequency components. None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. ❏ Subwoofer Set whether or not to use a subwoofer. ■ Configuration Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters. • When specifying the speaker size, set the speaker size to “Large” for each speaker with a 16 cm or larger Settings Use (Default) Select this when a subwoofer is connected to the unit. During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio from other channels. None Select this when no subwoofer is connected to the unit. The front speakers will produce bass frequency audio. woofer diameter, or to “Small” for a 16 cm or smaller woofer diameter. ❏ Front Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers. Settings “Phase,” “Bass Cross Over” and “Extra Bass” can be set only when “Subwoofer” is set to “Use.” ■ Phase Large Select this when large front speakers are connected. Small (Default) Select this when small front speakers are connected. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. Settings Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. • When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” “Large” is automatically selected. • If the bass audio is lacking or unclear, the audio may be improved by changing the phase of the subwoofer. ❏ Center Selects the size of the center speaker and whether or not to use the speaker. Settings Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected. The subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce center channel low-frequency components. None Select this when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. ■ Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.” Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (Default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz En 62 ■ Extra Bass Specifies a speaker to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel lowfrequency components. • When “Front” is set to “Small,” “Extra Bass” is automatically set to “Off.” ■ Distance Separately adjusts the timing at which each speaker produce audio so that sounds from the speaker reach the listening position at the same time. Submenu Meter Shows units of length in meters. Feet Shows units of length in feet. ■ Equalizer Selects an equalizer type. “YPAO:Flat,” “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” can be set after performing YPAO. Settings Through (Default) Disables the equalizer. Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality manually. For details, refer to “Adjusting the graphic equalizer.” YPAO:Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each speaker. YPAO:Front Sets the characteristics of each speaker to match the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural acoustics. ■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer 1 Select “Graphic EQ” in “Equalizer,” and then press ENTER. 2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a speaker to adjust, and then press ENTER. 3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a frequency you want to adjust. Choices 63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1.0 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/16.0 kHz 4 Press the cursor keys ( • The default setting of units of length differs depending on your country or region. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) / ) to adjust the volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default setting 0.0 dB *In 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) ■ Level Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default setting 0.0 dB • Repeat steps 3-4 to adjust the tone to your liking. • Press RETURN or the cursor keys ( / ) repeatedly to return to select a speaker to be adjusted (step 2). 5 Use the cursor keys ( / ) and select “EXIT,” and then press ENTER to finish “Equalizer.” En 63 ■ Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. When this setting is set to “On,” the volume balance settings for each speaker can be adjusted while listening to the output sound in other speaker settings (such as “Level” or “Graphic EQ”). Configuring the settings of audio output signals (Sound) Configuring the settings of audio output signals. Settings Off (Default) Does not generate test tones. On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced constantly. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function). ❏ Auto When connected to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts audio output timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function. If necessary, fine adjustment of the audio output timing is possible. The difference between the result of auto delay and the fine adjustments is displayed to the right of “Offset.” Setting range 0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments) Default setting 0 ms ❏ Manual Manually adjusts the correction time. Setting range 0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments) Default setting 0 ms En 64 ■ Dynamic Range Setting sound program and decoder parameters (DSP) Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bit stream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. Configuring the settings of sound programs and surround decoders. Settings Maximum (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use. Minimum/Auto (Minimum) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bit stream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. ■ Max Volume Specifies the maximum volume level that is adjustable with VOLUME on the remote control or VOLUME on the front panel. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default setting +16.5 dB ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (Default) The volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby mode. On Makes the initial volume Mute or -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB increments). (This setting is only available when setting a volume lower than Max Volume.) • Configurable items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Turns CINEMA DSP 3D (p.36) on or off. When CINEMA DSP 3D is set to On, the CINEMA DSP 3D mode automatically turns on in a sound program (except for 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On (Default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. • This setting can be set when the selected sound program supports CINEMA DSP. En 65 ■ Program ❏ 5ch Stereo Select and adjust a sound program and decoder. Select a sound program of which you want to change the settings, and then set the parameters for each item. The sound program is switched at this time. Center Level Adjusts the center channel volume. ■ Procedure Surround L Level 1 Press the cursor keys to select “Program” and then press ENTER. 2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program of which you want change Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. Surround R Level Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. Reset Initializes the level of each speaker. Item Description the settings, and then press ENTER. 3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item of which you want to change the items, and then press ENTER. 4 Press the cursor keys to adjust the parameters, and then press ENTER. 5 If necessary, repeat step 3 to 4 to set other items. 6 Press SETUP to finish “Program.” Setting 0% to 100% (Default: 100%) OK, CANCEL Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “OK,” and then press ENTER to initialize all level settings. • Selectable items in “5ch Stereo” vary depending on types of speakers connected to the unit. ❏ Category: MUSIC (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) • For details on sound program, refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect” (p.33). • Selectable items vary depending on the selected sound program or decoder. ❏ 2ch Stereo Item Direct Sound programs Hall in Munich, Hall in Vienna, Chamber, Cellar Club, The Roxy Theatre, The Bottom Line Item Description Setting Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog audio source is played back. Auto (Default), Off “Auto” outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit in the following situations. • Tone controls of “Bass” and “Treble” are set to 0 dB (p.57). • “Equalizer” is set to “Through” (p.63). • “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Off” (p.57). DSP Level Description Changes the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). Setting -6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB) The higher the value is, the stronger the effect level is output. The lower the value is, the smaller the effect level is output. En 66 ❏ Category: MOVIE ■ When “ Sound programs Sports, Action Game, Roleplaying Game, Music Video, Standard, Spectacle, Sci-Fi, Adventure, Drama, Mono Movie item Decode Type DSP Level Description Select a decoder to play back sources combined with a sound program. Changes the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). Setting Item Description Panorama Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Center Width Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right speakers to suit your needs or preferences. 0 to 7 (Default: 3) The higher the value is, the broader the center channel is output. The lower the value is, the narrower the center channel is output. Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. -3 to +3 (Default: 0) The higher the value is, the stronger the front sound field is. The lower the value is, the stronger the surround sound field is. PLII Movie, Neo:6 Cinema -6 dB to +3 dB (Default: 0 dB) The higher the value is, the stronger the effect level is output. The lower the value is, the smaller the effect level is output. ❏ SUR. DECODE Setting Off (Default), On When set to “On,” front left/right channels sounds are sent to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. • “Decode Type” is only available when selecting “Standard,” “Spectacle,” “Sci-Fi,” “Adventure” and “Drama.” item PLII Music” is selected: ■ When “Neo:6 Music” is selected: Description Setting Decode Type Select a decoder to play back sources Pro Logic, PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music Reset Initializes the settings of “SUR.DECODE.” OK, CANCEL Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “OK,” and then press ENTER to initialize the settings. Item Center Image Description Setting Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. 0.0 to 1.0 (Default: 0.3) The higher the value is, the stronger the center channel is and the narrower the center width is. The lower the value is, the weaker the center channel is and the broader the center width is. When selecting “ PLII Music” or “Neo:6 Music” in the “Decode Type,” the following settings can be set. En 67 Configuring the various settings (Function) Set the various features that have handy functions. 5 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select “OK,” and then press ENTER. 6 To change other input names, repeat step 2 to 5. 7 Press SETUP to close “Input Rename.” • Select “CANCEL” in step 5 to return to the previous screen without confirming the name changed. ■ Auto Power Down If you do not operate the unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). Settings ■ Input Rename Changes the input name displayed on the front display and TV screen. Input All inputs except for TUNER Off Auto Power Down function is disabled. 4Hours, 8Hours, 12Hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated the unit for the selected amount time. A countdown of 30 seconds is displayed on the front display before entering the standby mode. Default setting 8Hours (U.K. and Europe models) Off (Other models) ■ Procedure 1 Select “Input Rename,” and press ENTER. 2 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a name which you want to rename, and then ■ Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front display. press ENTER. 3 Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a preset name to your liking, and then press ENTER. Input currently edited Setting range -4 to 0 (The higher the value the brighter the display.) Default setting 0 ■ Short Message Turns the short message displayed on the TV screen on or off. For example, this settings is set to “Off” to prevent that the subscription of video images is got behind the short message. Settings Off Does not display the short message on the TV screen. On (Default) Displays the short message on the TV screen. When the output video signals are being upscalled, the short message may not be displayed. Input name currently renamed 4 (To confirm the selected name) Press ENTER. (To rename the selected name) Press the cursor keys ( / ) to select a character that you want to change, and then press the cursor keys ( / ) to change the character. En 68 ■ Memory Guard Setting HDMI functions (HDMI) Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings of the “Setup” menu, YPAO, and SCENE. Set the settings on HDMI functions. Settings Off (Default) Settings are not protected. On Prohibits changes to the settings in the “Setup” menu until it is returned to “Off.” During memory guard, the protection icon ( ) is displayed at upper right on the TV monitor. • If you try to set the protected items, “Memory Guard! (Memory Guard!)” is displayed on the front display and TV monitor. ■ HDMI Control Enable or disable the HDMI control (p.87). Settings Off (Default) Disables the HDMI control function. On Enables the HDMI control function. When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “TV Audio Input,” “ARC,” “Standby Sync” and “SCENE” can be set. • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” (p.70) or “Standby Through” (p.71) is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot be set manually. En 69 ❏ TV Audio Input ❏ SCENE Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while the HDMI Control function is on. When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source selected here. Specify whether or not a TV or external device (such as a BD/DVD player) connected to the unit is operated by interlocking by pressing SCENE. Choices BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO Settings Settings AV1-6 The selected input source between AV1 to 6 receives audio signals from TV. AUDIO AUDIO receives audio signals from TV. Off Does not synchronize the external device with SCENE. On Synchronizes the external device when pressing the appropriate SCENE. Default setting On (BD/DVD, TV) Off (CD, RADIO) Default setting AV4 • While “ARC” is set to “On,” the input source selected here is used for TV audio input. Therefore, the jack selected for the input source on the rear of the unit cannot be used. • When this item is set to “On” and the external devices that are compatible with the HDMI control function (with some exceptions) are connected to the unit, the SCENE synchronization is activated (p.32). ❏ ARC Enable or disable ARC (Audio Return Channel) (p.16). Settings ■ Audio Output Choose whether audio is played back through the unit or through a TV. Off Disables ARC (Audio Return Channel function). On (Default) Enables ARC (Audio Return Channel function). ❏ Standby Sync ❏ Amp Specify whether or not audio signals are output through the unit. Settings Specify whether or not to turn off the unit automatically when the TV connected to the unit with HDMI cable turns off. Off Audio is not output from speakers. On (Default) Audio is output from speakers. Settings Off Does not turn off the unit when the TV is turned off. On Always turns off the unit when the TV is turned off. Auto (Default) In a case of the followings, the unit turns off by interlocking power-off of the TV: • Watching the TV (input source is set to AV4.) • Using HDMI devices (input source is set to HDMI, and the device connected to HDMI jack is being played.) • “Standby Sync” is available only if your TV is compatible with the HDMI control function. ❏ HDMI OUT (TV) Specify whether or not audio signals are output through a TV connected via the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Off (Default) Audio is not output from the TV. On Audio is output from the TV. • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Audio Output” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot be set manually. En 70 ■ Standby Through Specify whether or not audio/video signals from HDMI inputs are to continue to be transmitted to a TV when the unit is in standby mode. Setting the language displayed on the TV screen (Language) Selecting the language displayed on the TV screen. Settings Off (Default) Does not output HDMI signals to a TV. On Outputs HDMI signals to a TV (1 to 3 W power consumption) • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On,” “Standby Through” is automatically fixed to “Control Sync” and cannot be set manually. • While “Standby Through” is activated, the standby indictor on the front panel lights up. • While “Standby Through” is activated, the input source can be switched between HDMI1-4 with the remote control. The standby indicator on the front panel flashes twice in response. Settings English (Default) English Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian • Only English is displayed on the front display. • Even if selecting a language in this item, the characters contained in the name of file, folder and song cannot be displayed in the selected language. En 71 Configuring the system settings of the unit (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Operating the ADVANCED SETUP menu Looking at the front display to configure the system settings of the unit. 1 Switch the unit to the standby mode if the unit is turned on. 2 Press while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Changing the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) SP IMP. -8 MIN Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings key 6ΩMIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are connected. 8ΩMIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are connected. Changing the remote control ID PROGRAM key STRAIGHT key 3 Press PROGRAM to select the item. 4 Press STRAIGHT to select the value. 5 Press to switch the unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The settings become effective and the unit is turned on. Features of the ADVANCED SETUP menu Items Descriptions SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Sets the impedance of speakers. REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver. TV FORMAT Specifies the TV’s color encoding format. INIT Initializes various settings for the unit. REMOTEID-ID1 The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (Default), ID2 ■ To change the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. 1 Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. 3 Enter “5019” (to switch to ID1) or “5020” (to switch to ID2) with the numeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. If SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks 6 times, the registration failed. Repeat from step1. • If the remote control ID is changed, the registered settings of the remote control code (p.75) are kept. En 72 Changing TV format TVFORMAT-NTSC Change the color encoding format of TV monitor to PAL or NTSC, to match the format used by the TV connected to the unit. Settings NTSC, PAL • The default setting differs depending on your country or region. Initializing various settings for the unit INIT-CANCEL Initialize various settings stored in the unit depending on the selected item from the following. Settings DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound programs. ALL Resets the unit to default factory settings. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize. En 73 CODE SET CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/ RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX V VAUX [A] A AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER Controlling other devices with the remote control You can operate an external device such as a TV or BD/DVD player with the remote control of the unit by setting the remote control code for the external device (remote control code). Registering remote control codes for TV operations Register a TV remote control code to control the TV with the remote control. USB • External devices that do not support infrared remote control cannot be used. FM AM PRESET INFO TUNING • Confirm that the remote control ID is set to “ID1” on the external device. If another MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SLEEP remote control ID is set on the external device, the remote control does not work • When the audio output jack on the TV is connected to the input jack on the unit, correctly even if the remote control codes for the external device are registered on follow the procedure in “Registering remote control codes for external device the remote control. operations” (p.75) to register a TV remote control code. DIRECT SCENE CD • Leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control for more than 2 minutes, may RADIO OPTION clear the registered remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes. VOLUME • When the external device cannot be operated with the remote control even if all DISPLAY A corresponding remote control codes are set to the remote control, the external POP-UP MENU device is not supported. MUTE MODE • The manufacturers and external devices that do not exit in “Remote Control Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Numeric keys 10 MUTE tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. number of a unit. TV TV VOL 2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the remote control. • Remote control code of an external device cannot be set from the name or model ENT to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of the TV. Search” contained in the CD-ROM are not available for operations of the unit’s TV INPUT 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM TV CH When the HDMI control functions of both unit and the playback device are enabled, the devices may be controlled using the remote control even if not registering the remote control code. 3 Press TV . 4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the numeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered successfully SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice. If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times. En 74 ■ Operating the TV with the remote control CODE SET CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX [A] AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER FM USB AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SOURCE/ RECEIVER Input selection keys HDMI 1-4 V-AUX AV 1-6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB [A] When the remote control codes for the TV are registered, the TV can be operated at any time using the TV control keys, regardless of the selected input source. TV operation keys INPUT Switches video inputs to the TV. MUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily. TV VOL Controls the volume of the TV. TV CH Switches TV channels. TV Turns the TV on and off. ENHANCER TV CD • Use [A] for external device operations only. Set this keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external device operations without linking to input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to 4 Enter a remote control code (4-digit) using the numeric keys. DIRECT Once the remote control code is registered successfully SOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice. SCENE BD DVD (Example) When the remote control codes for the BD/DVD player connected to HDMI1 jack are assigned, press HDMI1. assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SLEEP 3 Press an input selection key. RADIO SCENE • When a TV remote control code is registered to an input selection key, the TV can OPTION be operated using the TV operation keys only when the input source with the TV code registered is selected. VOLUME If the registration fails, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks six times. If the registration fails, repeat from step 2. DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU Registering remote control codes for external device operations MUTE MODE • For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Changing the settings for the SCENE function” (p.32). 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 Numeric keys ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH TV operation keys INPUT MUTE TV VOL TV CH TV Register remote control codes for external devices (such as a BD/ DVD player) to control them with the unit’s remote control. Because the remote control codes are registered to each input selection key, when you select an input source the remote control instantly switches to control that input source. • The CD player (Yamaha: 5095) to AV3 as factory default settings. No remote control keys are assigned to other input selection keys. 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to search the available remote control codes for the category, manufacturer, or external device. 2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. En 75 SOURCE CODE SET CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX [A] AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING SOURCE/ RECEIVER Input selection keys HDMI 1-4 V-AUX AV 1-6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER USB [A] SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE When the remote control codes for external devices are assigned to an input selection key, the external device can be controlled with the following keys after selecting the appropriate input source or SCENE. ENHANCER operation keys and numeric keys between the unit and external devices. The unit can be controlled when SOURCE/RECEIVER glows orange. External devices can be controlled when the key glows green. DIRECT CD RADIO SCENE OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN Menu operation keys Menu operation keys DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Turns on and off external devices. SOURCE SCENE TV MUTE MODE External device operation keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Initializing all remote control codes Initializing all remote control codes to the initial factory settings. 1 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. • Use SOURCE/RECEIVER to switch the device to be controlled with menu MUSIC SLEEP BD DVD ■ Operating external devices Cursor Selects an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. DISPLAY Switch the content of display. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP MENU Displays a pop-up menu. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes after the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. 2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. 3 Enter “9981” using the numeric keys. Once the remote control code is reset successfully SOURCE/ RECEIVER will blink twice. If the reset fails, SOURCE/ RECEIVER blinks six times. If setup fails, repeat from step 1. Stops playback. Numeric keys Stops playback temporarily. 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH TV operation keys External device operation keys INPUT MUTE TV VOL TV CH TV Starts playback of the currently selected song (or video). Searches backwards/forwards while pressing them. Skips to the beginning of the currently playing song (or video)/the next song (or video). Numeric keys Enter numbers. TV operation keys Operate a TV. • The keys above are only available when there are the corresponding keys on the remote control of external devices. En 76 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... If you have changed speakers or speaker system, perform YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.26). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.62). You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.69). The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and another Yamaha Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... product that is not intended... If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.65). When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case, set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver (p.72). I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when turning on this unit... By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be applied when this receiver is turned on (p.65). En 77 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below if the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Confirm the following points first. a The power plugs of the unit, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are plugged into the electric outlet securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and external devices (such as a BD/DVD player) are turned on. c The cables between devices are connected securely. Power/system Problem Cause Remedy The power will not turn on. The internal circuits of the unit have a problem. The capability to turn on the power is disabled as a safety precaution. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repairs. The unit cannot be turned off. The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in the power supply voltage. Press and hold rebooted. The unit enters standby mode soon after The unit was turned on while a speaker cable is shorted. the power is turned on. The unit enters standby mode. The unit does not work properly. (power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are connected properly. The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. The auto power down function is activated because of no operations with the remote control or the unit itself for a while. Set “Auto Power Down” to “Off” to disable the auto power down function (p.68). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are connected properly. The heat protection has been activated because sound was continually output at high volumes. Wait until the unit cools to normal temperature, turn on the unit again and turn down the volume level and play the source again (p.31). The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in the power supply voltage. Press and hold rebooted. (power) for over 10 seconds. The unit will be initialized and En 78 Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is output from one speaker. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. No sound from a device connected using an HDMI cable. Cause Remedy No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection key. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source device, such as a CD-ROM. Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on the unit. The mute function is activated. Press MUTE to unmute. The cable between the unit and the external device may be malfunctioning. Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are connected properly. If after checking you can find no problems, replace the cables. The max volume of the unit is restricted by “Max Volume” function. Adjust the max volume of the unit in “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu. The device connected to the output jack of the unit is not turned on. (This may occur because of the character of AV receiver.) Turn on all devices connected to the unit. Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the input source. You can confirm the number of source channels in the input signal with “Channel (Chan)” of “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58). Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the sound program or decoder. You can confirm the number of output channels with the speaker indicators on the front display (p.8). Output from the affected speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.26), or set the size or enable the affected speaker in “Configuration” (p.62) on the “Setup” menu. The volume of the affected speaker is set excessively low. Perform YPAO (p.26), or adjust the volume level of the affected speaker in “Level” (p.63) on the “Setup” menu. The cable between the unit and the external device may be malfunctioning. Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables. The affected speaker may be malfunctioning. Replace the affected speaker with another speaker that is operating correctly to confirm whether the speaker is malfunctioning. If no sound comes from the replacement speaker, the unit may be malfunctioning. “Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. The speakers that have a problem cannot be confirmed. Use “Test Tone” to confirm the speakers that do not output sounds (p.64). The source does not contain LFE or low frequency signals. To confirm, set “Extra Bass” to “On” to output the low frequency sound of the front channel from the subwoofer (p.63). The subwoofer is inactive. Perform YPAO (p.26), or set “Subwoofer” to “Use” in the “Setup” menu (p.62). The subwoofer is tuned off. Turn on the subwoofer. The volume of the subwoofer is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). You can confirm if message concerning HDMI error is displayed in “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58). HDMI input audio is set to not output from the speakers. Set “Amp” to “On” in “Audio Output” of the “Setup” menu (p.70). The number of devices is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. En 79 Problem Cause Remedy (When using HDMI Control function) The setting of “TV Audio Input” to match operations carried out on TV is not set. Select the appropriate audio input jack in “TV Audio Input” on the “Setup” menu. (When using the Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return Channel function is not working. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.70). Or, the Audio Return Channel function is activated on the TV. The TV is not ARC-compatible and connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Connect an optical cable to AV4 (p.18, 19), or other cables and set the appropriate input source with “TV Audio Input” (p.70). Sound is output from the TV. Set “HDMI Control” (p.69) or “Audio Output” (p.70) correctly to output sound from the unit. The playback device is set to output only 2 channel sound (such as PCM). Set the audio output settings on the playback device. The unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment (including iPhone). Move the unit further away from such equipment. The cable between the unit and the external device may be malfunctioning. Make sure that all speaker cables between the unit and speakers are connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables. Noise is heard when a DTS-CD is being played back. (When only noise is output) The playback device is connected by analog connection. Connect the playback device to the unit by a digital connection (optical or coaxial connection). If you still have a problem, the playback device may have a problem. The sound is distorted. The devices connected to the output jacks of the unit are not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit. The songs from the USB storage device are played back intermittently. The transfer rate of the USB storage device is too slow. TV sound is not output from the unit. Only the front speakers output sound during multi-channel playback. Noise/hum noise is heard. Try another USB storage device. Video Problem No picture. No picture from the video device connected with an HDMI cable. Cause Remedy An appropriate input source is not selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source (video device) using the input selection keys. An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate input on the TV. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by a monitor connected to the unit. (In case of HDMI signal) Set the playback device to output video signal that has a resolution supported by the unit. If the playback device cannot be set, use other video jacks to connect the device. The cable between the unit, the TV and the video devices may be malfunctioning. Make sure that all cables are connected properly. If no problem, replace the cables. You can confirm the video signal (resolution) currently being input in “Signal A video signal (resolution) that the unit does not support is being input. Info” in the “Option” menu (p.58). For detail on video signals which the unit supports, refer to “Information on HDMI” (p.87). The connected HDMI device does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Display “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu to confirm the video signal (resolution) currently input (p.58). The number of devices is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. En 80 Problem The menu of the unit is not displayed. Cause Remedy The TV is connected to the unit with a cable except for HDMI cable. Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to the unit. An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select the input source of the TV to the video input from the HDMI OUT of the unit. Tuner (FM/AM) Problem FM stereo radio reception is noisy. Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna is weak. Switch the receiving mode to monaural using MODE (p.38). The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing an outdoor AM antenna. AM radio reception is noisy. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. Select the station manually (p.38). Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. AM radio stations cannot be preset. Automatic station preset is used to preset AM stations. Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station preset. Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy Wrong distance. Operate the remote control within its operating range (p.4). The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries (p.4). Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The operation device is set to an external device. Switch the operation device to the unit using RECEIVER/SOURCE (it should glow orange) and operate the unit (p.10). The remote control ID of the remote control and the unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of the unit and the remote control (p.72). The operation device is set to the unit. Switch the operation device to the external device using RECEIVER/SOURCE (it should glow green) and operate the external device (p.10). The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly (p.74, 75). Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some devices that do not respond to the remote control. En 81 Message list Message (alphabetical order) Cause The unit cannot access your USB storage device or iPod. Access error There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device to the unit. Remedy Try another USB device or iPod. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the unit. When an iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on. CHECK SP WIRES! The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to the unit. Loading... The data of the USB storage devices and iPod are being loaded. It takes a long while to load the data when connecting a device that has a large amount of data. No content There is no playable data on the USB storage devices or iPod. Connect the USB storage device or iPod in which the playable data are stored. No device There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device to the unit. Turn off the unit and reconnect the iPod dock (p.44). Reconnect the iPod to the iPod dock (p.44). Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of the unit. When iPod is connected to the USB port, turn the iPod off and on. USB storage device is not connected to the USB port. Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the front panel of the unit. During pairing: - Pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth device and the unit simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth device is in pairing mode. Not found The Bluetooth device is not found. While connected: - Check if the Bluetooth device is turned on. - Check if the Bluetooth device is within 10 m (32 ft.) of the Yamaha Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver. - Do pairing again. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by the unit. Connect an iPod that is supported by the unit (p.43). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on your iPod. Check the songs stored on your iPod. Unable to play The song that the unit cannot play back is selected, or the selected song data is damaged. Select and play another song. Confirm the display on the TV connected with an HDMI cable. View ON SCREEN The selected item cannot be displayed on the front display. When “SETUP” is displayed at the upper left on the front display, press SETUP on the remote control to return to normal display on the front display. When “USB” or “DOCK” at the upper left on the front display, press the cursor key ( ) to return to the display of menu list or playing song. En 82 Ideal speaker layout The following illustration indicates the ideal speaker layout. We recommend using the following layout as a guide when placing the speakers. However, by using YPAO, you can automatically optimize the speaker settings to suit your speaker layout. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. En 83 Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multichannel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a highdefinition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. En 84 DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition discbased media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.” “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. En 85 Video signal flow The video signals input from video devices to the unit are output to a TV. • Analog video signal input to the unit is only output from the same type of analog video jack. • HDMI video signal is output from the HDMI OUT jack at the same resolution as that is input. Video device The unit TV Input Output HDMI1-4 HDMI OUT HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO (AV1-2) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y VIDEO VIDEO (AV3-6) VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO En 86 Information on HDMI HDMI Control Connecting the unit and TV with an HDMI cable links the TV’s remote control to the unit so you can use it to turn on the power and adjust the volume of the unit (HDMI Control). Playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable (such as a BD/DVD player compatible with HDMI control) can also be operated with the remote control. For details on operations between the TV and the playback devices using the HDMI control function, refer to the manual for each device. For details on connections of HDMI cables, refer to “Connecting a TV” (p.16) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.21). HDMI Control Playback device (such as a BD/DVD player) compatible with HDMI Control (such as a BD/DVD player) to “On.” Set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” to enable the HDMI Control function of the unit. 3 Turn the TV off. Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not synchronized, unplug the power cable of the TV. 4 Turn the TV on. HDMI Control The unit 1 Turn on the unit, the TV and external devices. 2 Set the HDMI Control function of the unit, the TV and external devices Confirm that the unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it on manually. TV TV’s remote control 5 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to the unit. 6 Turn the playback devices on, and confirm the following points. - Turning the power on and off The unit: Confirm that the input source for HDMI input (one of HDMI1-4) has been selected. If a different input source has been selected, change it manually. - Volume control, including mute TV: Operating the unit using the HDMI control function - Changing the input to video/audio from the operated external device Confirm that the video signal from the player is being properly received by the TV. 7 Confirm that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning on/off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • The following operations of the unit are interlocked with the TV/playback devices by HDMI control. - Switching a SCENE (p.32) - Displaying the “Setup” menu (p.60) - Operating external device with the unit’s remote control (p.75) • If the HDMI Control function does not work properly, unplugging and re-plugging the power cable of the unit and the TV may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of video output settings on the The following settings are required after connecting the TV and playback devices to the unit to use the HDMI Control function. TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices made by the same manufacturer so that the HDMI Control function works more effectively. • The following settings are required whenever a new HDMI compatible device is added. En 87 HDMI signal compatibility Trademarks Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the device). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. iPod™/iPhone™ “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. En 88 Specifications Input Jacks HDMI Compatible Decoding Format • Analog Audio...................... 4 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO, VIDEO AUX) • Input ......................................................................4 (HDMI1-4) • Digital Audio Optical...................................................................2 (AV1, AV4) Coaxial ..................................................................2 (AV2, AV3) • Output.................................................................1 (HDMI OUT) • Decoding Format Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD High Resolution DTS Express DTS DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 DTS 96/24 • Video Composite ............................................. 5 (AV3-6, VIDEO AUX) Component............................................................2 (AV1, AV2) • Other DOCK [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models] ..................................................... 1 (Audio, Composite Video) USB .........................................................................................1 Device Type................................... USB Mass Storage Class Audio Format ............MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM), MPEG-4 AAC Max Audio Support fs........................................48 kHz/24 bit Cover Art Format ................................................. PNG, JPEG PORTABLE ....................................................... 1 (VIDEO AUX) • HDMI Specification Deep Color “x.v.Color” Auto Lip Sync ARC (Audio Return Channel) 3D Video Output Jacks • Video Format Repeater Mode VGA 480i@60 Hz 576i@50 Hz 480p@60 Hz 576p@50 Hz 1080i@50/60 Hz 720p@50/60 Hz 1080p@24/50/60 Hz • Analog Audio Speaker Out ........................................................................5ch Front L/R (FRONT L/R) Center (CENTER) Surround L/R (SURROUND L/R) Subwoofer Out ..............................................1 (SUBWOOFER) Rec Out ...................................................................1 (AV OUT) Headphone Out.....................................................1 (PHONES) • Audio Format Dolby Digital DTS DSD (6ch) Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS-HD PCM (2ch to 8ch, Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Video Monitor Out Composite ............................................................................1 Component...........................................................................1 Rec Out Composite ............................................................1 (AV OUT) • Content Protection ........................................HDCP compatible • Post Decoding Format Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic II Music Dolby Pro Logic II Movie Dolby Pro Logic II Game DTS Neo:6 Music DTS Neo:6 Cinema • Link Function .................................................. CEC compatible Tuner • Analog Tuner FM/AM ..................................................................... 1 (TUNER) En 89 Audio Section • Rated Output Power (1 channel driven) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .....................................................................105 W/ch Center.........................................................................105 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................105 W/ch • Rated Output Power (2 channels driven simultaneously) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R ................................................................. 85 W+85 W Center................................................................................85 W Surround L/R .......................................................... 85 W+85 W • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) [China, Korea, Asia and General models] Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch Center.........................................................................135 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)...................................110/130/160/180 W [Other models] Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω).............................................110/130/150 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω.................................................................................. 0.2 dB • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω)............................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) .............................2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..............................100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ...........................+0/-3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV5 etc. (DIRECT, Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 100 dB or more • Volume Control Range ............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) Bass Boost/Cut ............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover................................................................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................ 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Video Section • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC [Other models] ................................................................... PAL • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Cb/Cr ............................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)...1.5 Vp-p • Video Signal to Noise Ratio ................................50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component ............................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model]....................AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ....................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................270 W/320 VA [Other models]................................................................ 280 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off ..............0.1 W or less HDMI Control On / Standby Through On..............1.2 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models]............................................. 470 W • Dimensions (W x H x D)............................435 x 151 x 363 mm (17-1/8" x 6" x 14-5/16") • Weight............................................................. 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs) FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono................................................................................ 72 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono................................................................................. 0.3% Stereo ............................................................................... 0.5% • Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................. 150 µV or less • Channel Separation AV5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more En 90 © 2011 Yamaha Corporation YD338B0/OMEN2-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V471 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V471 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha RX-V471 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha RX-V471 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V471 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V471 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V471 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V471 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V471 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V471 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha RX-V571 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A2000 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-A810 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V771 Installatie gids
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V2067 de handleiding